CURRICULUM - 2023

C -23

DIPLOMA IN
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &

TRAINING ANDHRA PRADESH

1
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM- 2023 (C-23)

INDEX

S.No Contents Page No.

1. Preamble 3

2. High lights of Curriculum (C-23) 5

3. Acknowledgements 6

4. Rules and Regulations 7

5. Vision and Mission 23

6. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations – 1 Year 25

7. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem 26

8. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem 27

9. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem 28

10. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem 29

11. I Year Syllabus 30

12. III Sem Syllabus 105

13. IV Sem Syllabus 144

14. V Sem Syllabus 178

15 VI Sem Syllabus 213

2
 PREAMBLE

Technical Education is a key driver of economic development and plays a crucial

role in providing individuals with the skills and knowledge necessary to thrive
in the workplace. As technological advancements continue to reshape industries
and create new opportunities, it is critical that technical education curricula remain
relevant and up-to-date.

The curriculum has been designed with this in mind, with a focus on practical
skills, critical thinking, and problem-solving. We believe that these skills are
essential for success in both academic and professional spheres. The revamping of
the technical education curriculum is made with collaborative effort from
educators, industry experts, policymakers, and students.

At the heart of the curriculum, is the belief that the technical education should be
student-centered, empowering learners to take ownership of their learning and
pursue their passions. We aim to create a learning environment that is safe,
supportive, and nurturing, where every student has the opportunity to reach their
fullest potential. We acknowledge that learning is a lifelong journey, and our
curriculum is designed to provide a solid foundation for continued growth and
development. We hope that our students will not only leave with a diploma but with
employability and passion for learning.

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been
offering Diploma programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake
holders: industries, students, academia, parents and the society at large. The
Curriculum should be flexible, adaptable, and responsive to the changing needs
of the industry and society. As such, it has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to
keep the curriculum abreast with the advances in technology through systematic
and scientific analysis of current curriculum and bring out an updated revised
version at regular intervals.

The design of Curriculum C-23was started in the month of January - 2023.

Feedback was collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior
Lecturers, Head of Sections and Principals for all programmes for this purpose.
Accordingly, a workshop was convened on 15th February 2023by Smt. C. Naga
Rani, I.A.S, Director of Technical Education & Chairperson, SBTET, AP to discuss
on revamping of C-20 curriculum to meet the needs of industries and for
improvement of placements.

The meeting was attended by Sri. Saurab Gaur,I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skill
Development & Training, Smt. LavanyaVeni, I.A.S, Director, Employment &
Training. Thirteen Representatives from Industries and Fourteen Academicians
from Higher Level Institutions and officials of ITI, Skill Development,
CTE&SBTET attended the workshop.

Smt. C Naga Rani, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education while addressing

in the workshop, emphasized the necessity of industrial training and on-hand
experience, that the students need to undergo to support the industries and the

3
 Gaps in the Curriculum need to be fixed to make the students passionate to work
in the industry in order to support economy of the country.
The committees of each branch consisting of experts from Industries, Higher Level
Institutions and Faculty of Polytechnics are informed to study the possibility of
incorporating the following aspects while preparation of the curriculum so as to
improve employability.
• To bring out industry-oriented Diploma Engineers.
• Internet of Things ( IoT) for all branches
• Theoretical & Practical subjects 50: 50 Ratio
• Industry 4.0 concepts.
• 5G Technology.
• Critical Thinking (Quantitative Aptitude, Data Interpretation, Quantitative
reasoning etc) to face the written tests conducted by the industries during
placements.
In continuation, series of workshops with subject experts followed in the
subsequent weeks for thorough perusal for preparation of draft curriculum. Also,
the suggestions received from representatives from various industries, academic
experts from higher level institutions, subject experts from Polytechnics, have
been recorded, validated for incorporation into the Curriculum C-23.Finally, the
draft curriculum was sent to academicians of higher-level institutions, industrial
experts for Vetting.

The design of new Curricula C-23 for different diploma programmes has thus
been finalized with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching
in the Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh, and duly reviewed by Expert Committee
constituted of academicians and representatives from industries. Thus, the
primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce employable diploma
holders in the country by correlating the growing needs of the industries with
relevant academic input.

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

throughout the design of this curriculum and designed to meet the requirements
of NBA Accreditation, too.

The Revised Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2023 (C-23) is approved by 45th

Academic Committee of SBTET, A.P for its implementation with effect from
Academic Year 2023-24. Also, the SBTET, A.P under the aegis of the Department of
Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh in it’s 62nd Board Meeting held on 13-07-2023
(vide item no: 17) Approved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum C-23 with effect
from the academic year 2023-2024 onwards after revamping the present C-20
curriculum, to meet the latest industrial technological developments including
Industry 4.0 concepts.

4
 2. HIGHLIGHTS OF CURRICULUM C-23

The following Courses/ Topics are incorporated in this curriculum C-23 as per the suggestions
received from Industrial Experts, Faculty of Higher Level Institutions and Polytechnics to
improve the Employability Skills of the Polytechnic Students.

1. Duration of course for regular Diploma is 3 years.

2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is
maintained as Year-wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses in
VI semester.
4. Updated subjects/topics relevant to the industry are introduced in all courses at
appropriate places.
5. The policy decisions taken at the State and Central level with regard to
environmental science are implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry.
This is also in accordance with the Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s
case.
6. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a
major role in the success of Diploma Level students in the industries, emphasis is
given for learning and acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in
English. Further as emphasized in the meetings, Communication Skills lab and
Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
7. Upon reviewing the existing C-20 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is
found to have more weightage than the Practical content. In C-23 curriculum,
more emphasis is given to the practical content in Laboratories and Workshops,
thus strengthening the practical skills. The ratio of Theory &Practicals is 50:50.
8. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course
content in all the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based
than the conventional procedure based.
9. Curriculum of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on
the suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the
equipment available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are
chosen for the practical sessions are identified to confirm to the field requirements
of industry.
10. The theory and practical subjects are restructured to find room for new theory
and practical subjects to meet the present the industrial needs.
11. To make the students effective and efficient in all aspects, three periods per
week are allotted in every year/semester for STUDENT CENTRIC ACTIVITY in
which student will be trained for placements or make use of library or participate
in sports & games/clean & green etc.

5
3. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The Members of the working group are grateful to Smt C. Naga Rani I.A.S.,
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, for continuous
guidance and valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying and updating
the Curriculum C-20 to Curriculum C-23.

We are grateful to Sri. S. Suresh Kumar, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skills

Development & Training for his valuable suggestions to bring the revamped
curriculum C- 23 in to a final form to meet latest Industry 4.0 concepts.

We are grateful to Sri. Saurab Gaur,I.A.S, former Principal Secretary, Skills

Development & Training who actively participated in the Industry-Academia
workshop conducted on 15th February, 2023 and offered valuable suggestions and
insights into the learning needs and preferences so that the curriculum is engaging,
inclusive, and effective.
It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of
Curriculum C-23. A series of workshops in different phases were conducted by
SBTET, AP, Guntur involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering
Colleges& representatives from various Industries and Dr. C. R. Nagendra Rao,
Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV to analyses the Previous C-20 Curriculum and in
designing of C-23 Curriculum, is highly appreciated and gratefully
acknowledged.

We also extend our sincere thanks to Sri. V. Padma Rao, Joint Director of Technical
Education, Sri K.V. Ramana Babu, Secretary, SBTE&T, Andhra Pradesh, Sri K.
Vijaya Bhaskar, Deputy Director (Academic), Andhra Pradesh, officials of
Directorate of Technical Education and the State Board of Technical Education,
Andhra Pradesh and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly
or indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.

6
 4. RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-23 CURRICULUM

4.1 Duration and pattern of the courses

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3
years or 3½ years duration of academic instruction. All the Diploma courses are
run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the remaining two or two & half
years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in
Bio-Medical course, the training will be in
the seventh semester. Run-through system is adopted for all the Diploma Courses,
subjectto eligibility conditions.
4.2 Procedure for Admission into the Diploma Courses:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this
regard from time to time.

a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have
to appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics
(POLYCET) conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training,
Andhra Pradesh, Vijayawada.Only the candidates satisfying the following
requirements will be eligible to appear for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a. The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of
their Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to
production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or
compartmentally at the time of admission.
b. Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra
Pradesh from time to time.
c. For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is
10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be
issued for admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy
4.3 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

4.4 Permanent Identification Number (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in

sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each
admitted candidate to maintain academic records.

4.5 Number of Working Days Per Semester / Year:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic

7
 Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180 days
excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to
any reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the
syllabus.

4.6 Eligibility (Attendance to Appear for the End Examination)

a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if
he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the
year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and
below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1st year
and not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end
examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may
seek re-admission for that semester / 1st year when offered in the next subsequent
academic semester/year.

For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:

i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training,the student
shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.

4.7 Readmission

Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/

Regional Joint Director.

a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D.
Pharmacy course or first year course in Engineering and Non-Engineering
Diploma streams). Otherwise, such cases shall not be considered for readmission
for that semester / year and are advised to seek readmission in the next
subsequent eligible academic year.
c) The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated
from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as
officially announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has
actually reported to the class work.

4.8 Scheme of Evaluation

8
 a) First Year
Theory Courses:Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with an end
examination of 3 hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of
20 marks. (Sessional marks). However, there are no minimum marks prescribed
for sessionals.

Laboratory Courses:There shall be 40/20 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional
marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying
60/30 marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessional.

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

Theory Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3hours duration 40/20
sessional marks.

4.9 Internal Assessment Scheme

a) Theory Courses:Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding Sessional marks
on the dates specified. Three-unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and
two Unit Tests for semesters. The details are presented below.
Type of Assessment Weightage
S. Assigned
No.
(i) Testing of knowledge through mid-examination for 40
year/sem as (Mid-1+Mid-2+Mid3) or (Mid-1 + Mid-2)
(ii) Assignments 5
(iii) Dynamic Learning activities : Project Work/ Seminar/Tech-
fest/Group Discussion, Quizzes etc./Extra-curricular 5
activities/NSS/NCC/ IPSGM/Cleaning & Greening of Campus
etc.
TOTAL 50

Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40

marks for each test.

At least one assignment should be completed for each unit which carries 10
marks.
The total assignment marks should be reduced to 5.

The dynamic learning activity is to be conducted which carries 10 marks. The total
marks should be reduced to 5.

The total 50 marks assigned to internal assignment is to be scaled down to 20

marks.

b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of Sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the

9
 following table:

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. Class work Exercises.
Tests.

➢ For first year engineering drawing each unit test will be conducted for a duration of
2 hours with maximum marks of 40.

➢ (Part - A: 4 questions x 5 marks = 20 Marks; Part –B: 2 questions x 10 marks = 20

marks).

➢ For the semester drawing examinations, Two Unit tests shall be conducted as per
the Board End Examination Question Paper Pattern.

➢ All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further
scrutiny by a competent authority

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

(a) Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the

year/ semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
(b) Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)
here after shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s performed
by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP &
NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and shall
be prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be
prepared as per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the
courseof study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the
concerned Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners.
External examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with
respective Head of Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the
order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways,
BSNL, APSRTC, APSEB etc.
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoD/Senior Lecture ( Selection Grade-II) from the Govt.Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in

10
 (a) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory
papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments /
exercise prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing,
trouble shooting, repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one
experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical
Courses are to be maintained for official inspection.

g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and

Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:

Assessment Upon Max

no completionof By Based on Marks

The faculty
1 12 weeks concerned (Guide) Learning outcomes as 120
and given in the scheme of
Training in assessment ,for Industrial
22 weeks charge (Mentor) of Training 120
2 the industry
1.Demonstration of any
The faculty member one of the skills listed in
3. Final concerned, learning outcomes 30
summative 24 week HoD concerned and 2.Training Report 20
Evaluation An external
examiner 3.Viva Voce
10

TOTAL 300
h) Each staff member including Head of Section shall be assigned a batch of students
10 to 15 for making assessment during industrial training.
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS
& COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING PROGRAMME:
1. Duration of the training: 6 months (24 weeks).
2. Eligibility: As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students can be trained in the relevant industries or
companies etc., related to Electronics & Communication Engineering fields.
4. The Industrial Training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in
assessment at industry (first and second assessment put together) and also
50% in final summative assessment at institution level.
5. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the
representative of the industry, where the student is undergoing training
and the faculty from the concerned section in the institution.
6. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in industrial assessments put
together, the student should reappear for 6 months industrial training at
his/her own expenses.
7. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at
institution level, the student should reappear for final summative
assessment in the subsequent board examination.

11
 8. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee
including 1. Head of the section (of concerned discipline ONLY),
2. External examiner from an industry and
3. Faculty member who assessed the student during
industrial training as member.
9. During Industrial Training the candidate shall put a minimum of 90%
attendance.
10. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the
student should reappear for 6 months industrial training at his/her own
expenses.

4.10 Minimum Pass Marks

a) Theory Examination:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end
examination marks put together.

b) Practical Examination:

For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting
and short hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for
typewriting and Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.

C) Industrial Training:
I. Monitoring: Similar to project work each teacher may be assigned a batch of 10-15
students irrespective of the placement of the students to facilitate effective monitoring
of students learning during industrial training.
II. Assessment: The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in
assessments at industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment
at institution level put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks. And also student has
to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level.
III. In-Plant Industrial Training for 3-Year Diploma (C-23) Courses is scheduled as per
the Academic Calendar of the SBTET every year.

4.11. Provision for Improvement

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from
First Year to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within
the succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the
duration including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from
the year of first admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or
Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is
allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations

12
 hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under
Mal-practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by
State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall
deposit the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also
original Diploma Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in performance
of the current examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original
Diploma Certificate will be issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.

4.12. Rules of Promotion From 1ST YEAR TO 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th Semesters:

A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration

i). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided
he
/ she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds up to
10%) and pay the examination fee.

ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pays the
examination fee.

iii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion
fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training AP from time
to time before commencement of 4th semester. A candidate is eligible to appear for
the 4th semester examination if he/she puts the required percentage of attendance
in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee.

iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 5thsemester and pays the
examination fee.

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

13
 puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i.) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for Third Semester examination

provided he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical
grounds up to 10%) and pay the examination fee for Third semester.
ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee.

iii) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.

iv)A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training and pays the examination fee.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto
10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than
65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate
who could not pay the 1st year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time

14
 before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he /
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination
fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance, which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-
VOCE examination at the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester .

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this
course. The industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester
(6 months) after the 6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%)
i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%
and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training

15
 from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 3rd semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 5th
semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.

v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the examination
fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 6th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester

IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.

vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement of
the 7th semester (Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she

16
 a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester Industrial
Training.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 7th semester Industrial
Training.

4.13. Students Performance Evaluation

Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions
of pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an
overall aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of
60% marks and above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an
overall aggregate of below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for
computing overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3rd and
subsequent Semesters.

ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%)
marks secured at the 3rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into
consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks secured by the
candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in
the regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations from the year of
first admission.

4.14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time.

4.15. Structure of Examination Question Paper:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three-unit tests for first year and two-unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with
a duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A
and Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions
first question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase
answer/filling-in the blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question. The
other four questions are short answer questions and carry three marks each.

Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie.,
Either/Or type , and each question carries 8 marks.

17
 The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters including
assignments and Dynamic learning activities (50 marks) shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.

b) For drawing Courses:For I year:

Three-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks
shall be conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.

Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries
four marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the
student shall answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each question
in this part carries a maximum mark of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).

The sum of marks obtained in 3-unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for
arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course
teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

For semester: Two-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks
of 40 marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2-unit test marks
shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20
marks are awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance
during regular class exercise.

c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded
based on continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes
and the remaining 50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the
students in two tests.

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course
be considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’ and ‘B’

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All
questions are to be answered and each carry 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.

Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 50contains 8 essay type questions. Only 5 questions
are to be answered and each carry 10 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 10 = 50.
Thus, the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.

Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in
section ‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.

Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall

18
 answer any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question
carries 10 Marks, i.e., 4 x 10 = 40.

c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up
a question paper distributed by Lottery System.

Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50

Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks
shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)
hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s performed by
the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and
posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET rules
in vogue.

4.16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum
of marks without any payment of fee. However, candidates who lose the original
memorandum of marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State
Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from
time to time.

4.17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES:

Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of
the course from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and
discontinuation of studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit
the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to
appear for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma courses
of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering courses.
4.18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the

following academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not

19
 more than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in
the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not
more than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in
the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

4.19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING&

REVERIFICATION:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED

ANSWER SCRIPT
i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script
should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’ and
Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course
experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the
already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately,
without making any changes on the already valued answer script. The marks
awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).

II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer script(s)
placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of maximum
marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the candidate, such
cases will not be referred to the next level ie., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of

20
 maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of maximum
marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on
Re-verification and secured pass marks on re- verification, then the status of the
candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on Re-
verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less than the
minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.

(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any therein
on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are revised,
the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate has to forfeit
the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued
answer script
would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted to
Malpractice in that examination.

4.20. Mal Practice Cases:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and
regulations in vogue.

4.21. Discrepancies/ Pleas:

Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the
SBTETAP within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such
cases shall be entertained in any manner.

4.22. Issue of Duplicate Diploma

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be

issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a
duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training,
A.P., on payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a
First-Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceable certificate from the Department
of Police. In case of damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a
duplicate certificate by surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of
prescribed fee to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.

In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the
date of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the
SBTET AP from time to time.

4.23. Issue of Migration Certificate and Transcripts:

21
 The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.

4.24. Specific Changes Incorporated In Present Curriculum C-23

ELECTRONICS& COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING BRANCH:

i) The course on 8086 Microprocessor (C-20) is found obsolete and hence removed
ii) A new practical course on Electrical Engineering Lab (EC-112) is introduced
iii) A new theory course on IoT and Sensors (EC-404) is introduced
iv) A new theory course on Digital Logic Design using Verilog HDL (EC-405) is
introduced
v) A new practical course on IoT and Sensors Lab (EC-409) is introduced
vi) A new practical course on Digital Logic Design through Verilog HDL Lab (EC-410) is
introduced
vii) A new theory course on Embedded Systems (EC-502) is introduced
viii) A new practical course on Embedded Systems Lab (EC-506) is introduced
ix) The course on Electronic Measurements and Consumer Gadgets is removed. Some
topics from this course are added in other appropriate courses.
x) In the course, Optical and Mobile Communications (EC-503), some obsolete topics on
telephony are removed and new topics on 5G technologies are added.
xi) In the course, Elements of Electrical Engineering (EC-106), some topics on Batteries
were added.
xii) The course on Industrial Electronics (C-20) is renamed as Industrial Electronics and
Automation (EC-504) and some topics on PLC & SCADA are added.
xiii) The course on Computer Hardware & Networking (C-20) is renamed as Data
Communication & Computer Networking (EC-505). Some topics on Computer
Hardware topics were removed and topics on Wireless technologies and Network
Security are added in the course.
xiv) The course on Industrial Management & Smart Technologies (C-20) is renamed as
Industrial Management & Entrepreneurship (EC-501). Topics on Smart Technologies
is removed and new topics on Industrial Safety are added in this course.

4.25. General

i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for
whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP
are within the jurisdiction of Mangalagiri.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.

22
 VISION
Develop Electronics and Communication Engineering professionals competent to face the global
challenges in a progressive environment conducive to learn technical knowledge, skills blended with
ethics and values, to serve the society and to better it for a happy and comfortable living.
MISSION

M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need-based curriculum designed

in collaboration with industry, conducive for high quality education emphasising on transfer
of knowledge and skill development essential for the profession and the society as well.
M2 To nurture higher order leadership qualities and ethics and values in students to enable
them to be leaders in their chosen professions while maintaining the highest level of ethics.
M3 To encourage the spirit of inquisition to promote innovation and entrepreneurship
strengthened with life skills to sustain the stress.
M4 To foster effective interactions and networking with all the stake holders so as to work
towards the growth and sustainability of the society and environment.

Programme Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Diploma in Electronics and Communication Engineering programme is steadfast to transform

students in to competent professionals with qualities of good human values and responsible citizens.
On completion of the Diploma programme, the students should have acquired the following
characteristics
PEO1 To apply technical knowledge and management principles in analysing and planning
problems in the field of electronics and Communication Engineering while ensuring
maximization of economic benefits to society and minimization of damage to ecology and
environment
PEO2 To be life-long learners with sprit of enquiry and zeal to acquire new knowledge and skills
so as to remain contemporary and possess required professional skills.
PEO3 To enhance entrepreneurial, communication and other soft skills, which will enable them
to work globally as leaders, team members and contribute to nation building for the
betterment of the society.
PEO4 To make them strongly committed to the highest levels of professional ethics and focus
on ensuring quality, adherence to public policy and law, safety, reliability and
environmental sustainability in all their professional activities

23
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES(POs)

1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics, science
and engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using codified
standard methods
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical problems
and assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet specified needs
4. Engineering tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
5. Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
6. Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team
member or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well-defined
engineering activities.
7. Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engaging updating in the
context of technological changes.

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES(PSOs)

1. An ability to understand the concepts of basic Electronics & Communication Engineering and
to apply them to various areas like Signal processing, VLSI, Embedded systems,
Communication Systems, Digital &Analog Devices, etc.

2. An ability to solve complex Electronics and Communication Engineering problems, using

latest hardware and software tools, along with analytical skills to arrive cost effective and
appropriate solutions.

3. Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career in the field of Electronics and Communication Engineering and to sustain
passion and zeal for real-world applications in the field of Electronics using optimal
resources as an entrepreneur.

24
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
FIRST YEAR
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods/ week
Subject Name of the Total
Code Subject End
Practical/ Periods Duration Sessional Total
Exam
Theory Tutorial /year (hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY

EC-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
EC-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - I

EC-103 Engineering Physics 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
Chemistry
EC-104 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
&Environmental
Studies
Electronic
EC-105 Components and 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Devices
Elements of
Electrical
EC-106 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Engineering

PRACTICAL

EC-107 Engineering Drawing - 3 90 3 40 60 100

Electronic
EC-108 components and - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Devices Lab
EC-109 Physics Lab - 1.5 45 20 30
3 100
(1.5+1.5) (50+50)
EC-110 Chemistry Lab 1.5 45 20 30
Computer
EC-111 Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
Electrical Engineering
EC-112 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
Activities 3 90 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 1260 320 780 1100
Note: 1) EC-101, 102, 103, 104, 109, 110,111 are common with all branches
2) EC-107 is common with EE/AEI/BME-107

25
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
III SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical s/ Sem Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
EC- 301 Mathematics - 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
II
Electronic
EC -302 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Circuits -I
Digital
EC -303 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Electronics
Analog and
Digital
EC-304 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communicatio
n Systems
Network
EC-305 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Analysis
Programming
EC-306 in C and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
MATLAB
PRACTICAL
Electronic
Circuits-I &
EC-307 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Network
Analysis Lab
Digital
EC-308 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Electronics lab
Analog and
Digital
EC-309 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Communicatio
n systems Lab
Programming
in C and
EC-310 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
MATLAB
Practice Lab
Activities 3 45 - - - -

TOTAL 26 16 630 - 280 720 1000

Note: EC-301 is common with AEI/BM/CH/CHOT/CHPP/CHPC/CHST-301

26
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
IV SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Periods End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical / Sem Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Electronic
EC-401 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Circuits-II
Microcontrollers
EC-402 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Interfacing
Microwave &
Satellite
EC-403 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communication
systems
EC-404 IoT and Sensors 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Digital Logic
EC-405 Design through 5 75 3 20 80 100
Verilog HDL
PRACTICAL
Electronic
EC-406 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Circuits-II Lab
Microcontrollers
EC-407 and Interfacing - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Communication
EC-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
skills Lab
IoT and Sensors
EC-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Digital Logic
EC-410 Design through - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Verilog HDL Lab
Activities 3 45 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 630 - 300 700 1000
Note: EC-408 is common with all branches

27
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
V SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Periods
Code Subject End Total
Prac / Sem Duration Sessional
Theory Exam
tical (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

Industrial
EC-501 Management and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Entrepreneurship
EC-502 Embedded Systems 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Optical & Mobile
EC-503 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communications
Industrial
EC-504 Electronics and 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Automation
Data
Communication
EC-505 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Computer
Networks
Embedded Systems
EC-506 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Industrial
EC-507 Electronics and - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Automation Lab
EC-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Advanced
Communication
EC-509 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
and Networking
Lab
EC-510 Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Activities 3 45 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 630 - 300 700 1000
Note: EC-508 is common with all branches

28
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
C-23-VI Semester

EC-601, INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Subject Scheme of evaluation

SI.No. Duration
Item Nature Max. Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First Assessment
outcomes by both
at Industry (After 120
the faculty and
12 Weeks)
training mentor of
the industry
Assessment of
2.Second learning
Assessment at the outcomes by both
120
Industrial Industry (After 20 the faculty and
1 6 months
Training weeks)) training mentor of
the industry
Training Report 20
Demonstration of
any one of the
Final Summative 30
skills listed in
assessment at
learning
institution level
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

The Industrial Training shall carry maximum 300 marks. Pass mark is 50% in first and second
assessment put together and also 50% in final summative assessment at the institution level.

29
FIRST YEAR

30
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
FIRST YEAR
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods/ week
Subject Name of the Total
Code Subject End
Practical/ Periods Duration Sessional Total
Exam
Theory Tutorial /year (hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY

EC-101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
EC-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - I

EC-103 Engineering Physics 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
Chemistry
EC-104 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
&Environmental
Studies
Electronic
EC-105 Components and 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Devices
Elements of
Electrical
EC-106 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Engineering

PRACTICAL

EC-107 Engineering Drawing - 3 90 3 40 60 100

Electronic
EC-108 components and - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Devices Lab
EC-109 Physics Lab - 1.5 45 20 30
3 100
(1.5+1.5) (50+50)
EC-110 Chemistry Lab 1.5 45 20 30
Computer
EC-111 Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
Electrical Engineering
EC-112 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
Activities 3 90 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 1260 320 780 1100
Note: 1) EC-101, 102, 103, 104, 109, 110,111 are common with all branches
2) EC-107 is common with EE/AEI/BME-107

31
 ENGLISH

No. of Total No. of Marks

Course Code Course Title Marks for SA
Periods/Week Periods for FA
EC-101 English 3 90 20 80

No of Periods COs Mapped

S. No. Title of the Unit

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
9 The End Point First 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
Total Periods 90

- To improve grammatical knowledge and enrich vocabulary.

- To develop effective reading, writing and speaking skills.
Course Objectives
- To comprehend themes related to Personality, Society, Environment to
exhibit Universal Human Values.

CO No. Course Outcomes

Learn and apply various grammatical concepts to communicate in academic,
CO1
professional and everyday situations
CO2 Use appropriate vocabulary in various contexts
Read and comprehend different forms of academic, professional and general reading
CO3
material
Communicate effectively in speaking and writing in academic, professional and
CO4
everyday situations.
Display human values by applying the knowledge of themes related to Self, Society,
CO5 Environment, Science and Technology for holistic development and harmonious living
through communication.

CO-PO Matrix

32
Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90
Common-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 5
POs Mapped CO CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks
No. Column 1 Mapping
Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly Applicable for English course, however, the language
PO2 activities make use of the content from Science and Technology
PO3 relevant to the programme to enhance English communication
skills.
PO4

PO5 CO5 16 18% Level 1

Up to 20%: Level 1
PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58% Level 3 21%-50%: Level 2
CO3, CO4, >50%: Level 3
PO7 CO1, CO2, 22 24% Level 2
CO3,
CO4,CO5

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped, Level 2- Moderately Mapped; Level 1- Slightly Mapped

Learning Outcomes

1. English for Employability

1.1. Perceive the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences

2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually

3. Connect with Care

3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues about everyday situations

4. Humour for Happiness

4.1. Realize the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Inculcate reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement

33
4.5. Understand the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.

5. Never Ever Give Up!

5.1. Learn to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking and
writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Understand the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events and talk about future actions
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails

7. The Rainbow of Diversity

7.1. Appraise and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. Understand the usage of different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations

8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas

8.1. Understand the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. Understand the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Learn about latest innovations and get motivated

9. The End Point First!

9.1. Understand the importance of setting goals in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life

10. The Equal Halves

10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing

11. Dealing with Disasters

11.1. be aware of different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Learn and write different kinds of reports

34
Textbook: ‘INTERACT’ (A Text book of English for I Year Engineering Diploma Courses) - by SBTET, AP
Reference Books:
Martin Hewings: Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond :English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum :Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised by N.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT
Books, S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman: Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
___________________
End Exam ( 80 Marks) 1,2,3 Unit Tests ( 20 Marks each)
Part A 10 Question 5 Questions
@ 3 Marks @ (1Q X4M) + (4Q X3M =12)
Total = 30 Marks Total = 16 Marks
Part B 5 Questions ( + 3 Choice) 3 Questions ( with internal choice)
@10 Marks @ 8 Marks
Total = 50 Marks Total = 24 marks
Grand Total 80 Marks 40 Marks

Time Schedule : C23-Common- 101 : ENGLISH

No. of Short No. of
Periods Weightage Mapping of
S.no. Title of the Unit answer Long Answer
allotted of Marks COs
questions questions
English for CO1, CO2, CO3,
1 8 1 CO4, CO5
Employability
16 2
CO1, CO2, CO3,
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO4, CO5

2 CO1, CO2, CO3,

3 Connect with Care 8 CO4, CO5
Humour for 26 2 CO1, CO2, CO3,
4 8 CO4, CO5
Happiness
CO1, CO2, CO3,
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 10 1 CO4, CO5
1 CO1, CO2, CO3,
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO4, CO5
The Rainbow of CO1, CO2, CO3,
7 8 23 2 CO4, CO5
Diversity
2
New Challenges - CO1, CO2, CO3,
8 8 CO4, CO5
Newer Ideas 1
CO1, CO2, CO3,
9 The End Point First 8 19 1 CO4, CO5
CO1, CO2, CO3,
10 The Equal Halves 8 1 CO4, CO5
Dealing with 1 CO1, CO2, CO3,
11 9 16 1 CO4, CO5
Disaster
Total 90 110 30 80

35
 S. No. Title of the Unit No of Periods COs Mapped
1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
Total Periods 90

- To improve grammatical knowledge and enrich vocabulary.

- To develop effective reading, writing and speaking skills.
Course Objectives
- To comprehend themes related to Personality, Society, Environmentto
exhibit Universal Human Values.

CO No. Course Outcomes

Apply and use various grammatical rules and concepts to communicate in academic,
CO1
professional and everyday situations
CO2 Use appropriate vocabulary in various contexts.
CO3 Read and comprehend different forms of academic, professional and everyday texts.
Communicate effectively in speaking and writing in academic, professional and
CO4
everyday situations.
Display human values by applying the knowledge of themes related to Self, Society,
CO5
Science and Environment for holistic and harmonious living through communication.

CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English
No. of Periods: 90
Common-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 5
CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of
Mapped Remarks
POs Column 1 Mapping
with CO No.
Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1
Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that use
PO2
content from science and technology relevant to the Programme taken
PO3
up by the student shall be exploited for communication in the Course.
PO4
PO5 CO5 16 18% >50%: Level 3
CO1, CO2, CO3,
PO6 CO4,
52 58%
21-50%: Level 2
CO1, CO2, CO3,
PO7 CO4, CO5
22 24% Up to 20%: Level 1
Level 3 – Strongly Mapped, Level 2- Moderately Mapped; Level 1- Slightly Mapped

36
Learning Outcomes

1. English for Employability

1.1. Perceive the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care
3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues about everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness
4.1. Realize the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Inculcate reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Understand the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!
5.1. Learn to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking
and writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary
5.4. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Understand the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails
7. The Rainbow of Diversity
7.1. Appraise and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. Understand the usage of different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas
8.1. Understand the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. Understand the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Learn about latest innovations and get motivated

37
9. The End Point First!
9.1. Understand the importance of setting a goals in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves
10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters
11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Learn and write different kinds of reports

Textbook:‘INTERACT’ (A Textbook of English for I Year Engineering Diploma Courses) - by SBTET, AP

Reference Books:

Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press

Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised byN.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT
Books, S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan

End Exam = 80 Marks

PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks

PART-B: 5 out of 8 are to be answered : 10 marks each =50 Marks

Unit Tests 1,2,3 @ 40 Marks each

Part A: 16 marks: One question for 4 marks + 4 questions for 3 marks each ( 4+12 Marks=16 Marks)

Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions for 8 marks each with internal choice. ( 3X8 Marks= 24 Marks)

38
 Weightage Table : C23-EC-101: English
Periods Weightage Marks Wise
Weightage Distribution of
Allocate of Marks CO's
S. (Long Weightage ( Short
Name of the d Allocated Mapped
N answer answer questions)
Unit (Total ( Short +
o. questions) @3 Marks
90 Long Answer
@10 Marks R U Ap An
periods) question)
CO1, CO2,
English for
1 8 3 CO3, CO4,
Employability CO5
CO1, CO2,
Living in
2 8 2 CO3, CO4,
Harmony CO5
CO1, CO2,
Connect with 20+9
3 8 3 CO3, CO4,
Care CO5
CO1, CO2,
Humour for
4 8 CO3, CO4,
Happiness CO5
CO1, CO2,
Never Ever 2
5 8 CO3, CO4,
Give Up! 3+ CO5
3
3 CO1, CO2,
Preserve or
6 9 CO3, CO4,
Perish CO5
20+9
CO1, CO2,
The Rainbow
7 8 3 CO3, CO4,
of Diversity CO5
New CO1, CO2,
8 Challenges - 8 10+3 1 3 CO3, CO4,
Newer Ideas CO5
CO1, CO2,
The End Point
9 8 1 3 CO3, CO4,
First! 10+3 CO5
CO1, CO2,
The Equal
10 8 10+3 1 3 CO3, CO4,
Halves CO5
CO1, CO2,
Dealing with
11 9 10+3 1 3 CO3, CO4,
Disasters CO5
Short Answer Questions 30 6 6 15 3
Long Answer Questions 80 8
(Integratio
n of the
cognitive
skills of
Total 110 Understand
ing,
Applying
&Analysing
)

39
 C23- EC-101: ENGLISH: END EXAM ( 80 Marks )
Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)
S.No.
Language Skill / grammatical
of the Weightage of Marks Sub aspects & Description
Concept of the question
Question
PART-A ; 10 questions X3 marks = 30 Marks
1 3 Articles & a) Definite, indefinite articles
( 6 Questions X ½ Prepositions b) prepositions of place, time, directions
Mark)
2 3 Vocabulary Synonyms, Antonyms, affixes, words&
( 6 Questions X ½ phrases, Phrasal Verbs, words matching with
Mark) meanings, one word substitutions,
3 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs
( 6 Questions X ½ ( be/do/have)
Mark) b) Modal verbs
4 3 Tenses Using appropriate Verb forms
( 3 questions 1 mark
each )
5 3 Voice Conversion : Active & Passive voice
( 3 questions 1 mark
each )
6 3 Adjectives Using appropriate adjective form/ conversion
( 3 questions 1 mark : Degrees of comparison
each )
7 3 Types of sentences & positive, Conversion from one type of sentence to the
( 3 questions 1 mark negative sentences other , making negative sentence
each )
8 3 Syntheses of Sentences / Transformation of sentences : Simple, complex
( 3 questions 1 mark Conjunctions / linkers & compound sentences / use of linkers/
each ) conjunctions
9 3 Direct& Indirect Speech Conversion from Direct to Indirect & Vice
( 3 questions 1 mark versa
each )

10 3 Correction of Sentences Remaining grammar aspects

( 3 questions 1 mark ( concord & usage based…etc)
each )
PART –B ; 5 QX10 M = 50 Marks
11 10 Marks Paragraph Writing From Units 1,2,3
(theme based- focus on importance of
learning and using English)
12 10 Giving instructions or directions From Units 4,5,6,7
13 10 Dialogue writing Theme based / Situation based /role play/
general topic
14 10 Essay writing From Units 8,9,10,11
(theme based )
15 10 Letter writing Formal / informal letters
16 10 Report Writing Report on Mini projects/ industrial visits /
camps/ events / celebrations
17 10 a) E-Mail writing a) E mail etiquette
( 2 questions X 5 b) Framing questions b) Who & Yes-No questions
Marks)
18 10 (Ten questions 1 Reading Comprehension An unseen piece of prose with 10 questions for
mark each ) reading comprehension check

40
 C23-EC-101 :English : Bifurcation of Syllabus for UNIT TESTS 1,2,3

Unit Test Lessons / Grammar / Language aspects Writing Skills

Chapters ( Topics or Short Answer ( Topics for Long answer/ Essay
questions) Questions)
U.T 1 Chapters a)articles & prepositions, a) Theme based Paragraph
1,2,3 b)Vocabulary: Affixes, ( focus on LSRW skills, importance
synonyms, Antonyms, of English, Self-esteem, SWOC
matching meanings, words & analysis, Social media )
phrases, one word b) Dialogue on themes of lessons 2&3
substitutes) / Dialogue on General topic / a
c)Adjectives ( degrees of situation
comparison) c) Reading comprehension
d) Main& Auxiliary Verbs
e) phrasal verbs/ word order

U.T 2 Chapters a) concord a) Theme based paragraph

4,5,6,7 b) Tenses ( Humour for happy living, learning
c) Types of sentences from failures, Environmental
d) Framing questions protection, multi- culture /global
e) words &phrases, linkers culture )
b) Letter writing ( formal& informal),
c) instructions/ directions, E-mail
writing

U.T 3 Chapters a) Voice (active &passive) a) Theme based paragraph/ Essay

8,9,10,11 b) Speech( direct& indirect) writing ( Technical innovations, Goal
c) Synthesis of sentences setting, gender sensitivity, dealing
( simple, complex, compound with disaster)
sentences) b) Essay writing, Report writing
d) Error analysis c) Reading Comprehension
e) words &phrases, linkers
Unit Test Total 40 Short Answer questions Long Answer Questions: ( Part-B)
Question Marks ( Part-A) Q. 6,7,8 @ 8 marks each ;
Paper ( Part A=16 Q. 1 = 4 marks Each question with Internal choice
pattern Part B =24) Q. 2 to 5 = 3 Marks each Total: 8X3 = 24 Marks
(40Marks Total=16 Marks
)

41
 C23- EC-101: ENGLISH:UNIT TEST Exams 1,2,3 ( 40 Marks each )
Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)
S.No. Weightage of Language Skill / Sub aspects & Description
of the Marks grammatical Concept of
Question the question
UNIT TEST-1 Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 1,2,3 ) :
PART-A : 16 Marks
S.No. Marks allotted Grammatical concept/ Sub topics / concepts
aspect/ skill
1 4 Marks Vocabulary a) Affixes, b) Synonyms
( 8 Questions X c) antonyms
½ Mark) d)one word substitutes
2 3(6 Questions X Articles &Prepositions a) Definite, indefinite articles
½ Mark) b) Prepositions of place, time direction
3 3 ( 3 questions Adjectives a) Using appropriate forms of adjectives
1 mark each ) b) Conversion of Degrees of comparison

4 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs ( be/do/have)

( 6 questions ½ b)Modal verbs
mark each )
5 3 Marks Phrasal verbs Using phrasal verbs in sentences of one’s own
( 3 questions 1
mark each )
Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Paragraph question Theme based questions : Lesson 1 :
A or B ( internal choice) Focus on LSRW skills, problems and solutions in
using English, Importance of English, English for
employability, SWOC analysis
7 8 Dialogue making Conversation / Role play between two people :
A or B ( internal choice ) a) Dialogue on themes of lessons 2&3
b) Dialogue on General topic / a situation
8 8 Reading Comprehension Unseen prose passages with 8 different questions (
A or B FIVE model questions+ Others)
( internal choice )
Unit Test -2: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 4,5,6,7)
Part – A: 16 Marks
1 4Marks Tenses Present, Past, Future tenses : Filling in with proper
verb forms using the given base form
2 3 Concord Concord: agreement between subject and verb

3 3 Framing questions Framing Wh& Yes-No questions

4 3 Types of sentences Conversion of sentences ( except questions) , Using

of proper linkers / discourse markers
5 3 Marks Words& Phrases , linkers Using words& phrases, linkers in sentences of
one’s own
Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Paragraph writing a) Themes on lessons 4/5
A or B ( internal choice ) b) Themes based on lessons 6/7
7 8 Letter Writing a) Letter writing : formal
( internal choice : A or B ) b) Letter writing: Informal
8 8 a) Paragraph: Tenses a) Paragraph on Routines/ past narration / Future
Reinforcement plans
b) Email & Instructions/ b) i) E- Mail writing ( formal or informal)

42
 directions ii ) Giving instructions/ directions
Unit Test -3: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 8,9,10,11)
Part – A ; 16 Marks

1 4 Marks Error Analysis Find errors and make corrections

2 3 Voice Conversion: Active & Passive voice
3 3 Synthesis of sentence Conversion: Simple, complex & compound
sentences
4 3 Reported speech Conversion: Direct & Indirect speech
5 3 Words & phrases, linkers Matching words with their meanings/
Using words& phrases, linkers in sentences of
one’s own
Part- B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Essay writing a) Theme based ( lessons 8 / 9 )
A or B ( internal choice ) b) Theme based ( Lessons 10/11)
7 8 Report writing a) Report on Mini projects/ industrial visits /
A or B ( internal choice ) camps/ events /exhibitions / celebrations
b) themes from lessons 8 to 11 …like disaster
management / technical inventions / gender
equality/ goal setting
8 8 Reading Comprehension Reading passages with 8 different questions ( FIVE
A or B ( internal choice ) model+ others)

-0o0-

43
 EC-102, ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
(Common to all Branches)

Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Code Periods/week periods
Engineering
EC-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I

S.No. Chapter No. of Marks Short Essay COs

Periods Allotted type type mapped
Unit - I: Algebra
1 Functions 6 3 1 0 CO1
2 Partial Fractions 5 3 1 0 CO1
3 Matrices and Determinants 20 16 2 1 CO1
Unit - II: Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric Ratios 2 0 0 0 CO2
5 Compound Angles 5 3 1 0 CO2
6 Multiple and Submultiple 1 0 CO2
8 3
angles
7 Transformations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
8 Inverse Trigonometric 0 1/2 CO2
6 5
Functions
9 Trigonometric Equations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
10 Properties of triangles 5 5 0 1/2 CO2
11 Complex Numbers 6 3 1 0 CO2
Unit III: Co-ordinate Geometry
12 Straight Lines 5 3 1 0 CO3
13 Circles 6 5 0 1/2 CO3
14 Conic Sections 12 5 0 1/2 CO3
Unit – IV: Differential Calculus
15 Limits and Continuity 6 3 1 0 CO4
16 Differentiation 28 23 1 2 CO4
Unit – V: Applications of Derivatives
17 Geometrical Applications 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
18 Physical Applications 6 5 0 1/2 CO5
19 Maxima and Minima 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
20 Errors and Approximations 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
Total 150 110 10 8
Marks 30 80

(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-ordinate

Course Objectives Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.

CO1 Identify functions as special relations, resolve partial fractionsand

solve problems on matrices and determinants.

44
Course Outcomes CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their
inverses and complex numbers.
CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic
sections in coordinate system.
CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
CO5 Find solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.

Learning Outcomes:
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices and
determinants.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, Ordered pair and Cartesian product of two sets - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and Functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Define one-oneand onto functions.
1.5 Find the inverse of a function – simple examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving proper fractions of the types mentioned
below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax + b)(cx + d ) (ax + b)2 (cx + d )
1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as commutative, associative and distributive
properties with examples and counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and state its properties – examples.
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples. Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix; minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of
determinants to solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse
of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method.
UNIT - II
C.O. 2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex
numbers.

45
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle - List the values of trigonometric ratios at
specified values.
2.2 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions - Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.3 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).
2.4 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.5 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.6 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.7 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angle
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.8 Derive useful allied formulae like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.9 Solve simple problems using the multiple and submultiple formulae.
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
2.10 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios into
a product and vice versa - examples on these formulae.
2.11 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of two
terms.
2.12 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.13 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
2.14 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that the given inverse
trigonometric function can be expressed in terms of other inverse trigonometric
functions with examples.
2.15 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = , etc.
2
−1 −1 −1  x+ y 
2.16 Apply formulae like tan x + tan y = tan   , where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
 1 − xy 
to solve Simple problems.
2.17 Explain what is meant by solution of trigonometric equations and find the general
solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.18 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0 and a sin x + b cosx=c.
2.19 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule and solve a triangle using
these formulae.
2.20 List various formulae for the area of a triangle with examples.
2.21 Define a complex number, its modulus, conjugate, amplitude and list their properties.
2.22 Define arithmetic operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.23 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.

UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in coordinate
system.

46
L.O. 3.1 Write different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form (or perpendicular
form).
3.2 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.3 Define locus of a point and circle.
3.4 Write the general equation of a circle and find its centre and radius.
3.5 Find the equation of a circle, given (i) centre and radius, (ii)two ends of the diameter(iii)
three non collinear points of type (0,0) (a,0), (0, b).
3.6 Define a conic section - Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus-
rectum of a conic with illustrations.
3.7 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.8 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along the co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on these conics.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x) = l and state the
x →a
properties of limits.
𝑓(𝑥) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
𝑥→𝑎 𝑔(𝑥) x → g ( x)
xn − an a x −1
4.3 State the Standard limits lim , lim sin x , lim tan x , lim ,
x →a x − a x→0 x x→0 x x →0 x
ex −1
1 x
, lim (1 + x) x , lim 1 +  (without proof) and solve simple problems
1
lim
x →0 x x →0 x →  x
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
f ( x + h) − f ( x )
as lim and also provide standard notations to denote the
h→0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 Explain the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivative of standard algebraic, logarithmic, exponential and trigonometric
functions using the first principle.
4.8 Find the derivatives of inverse trigonometric, hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic
functions.
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with simple illustrative examples.
4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Explain the method of differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.12 Explain the procedure for finding the derivatives of implicit functions with examples.
4.13 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions of [f(x)]g(x) type
– examples on logarithmic differentiation.
4.14 Explain the concept of finding the second order derivatives with examples.

47
 4.15 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, finding partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.16 Explain the concept of finding second order partial derivatives with simple problems.

C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation

L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative - Explain the concept of derivative to
find the slopes of tangent and normal to a given curve at any point on it with examples.
5.2 Find the equations of tangent and normal to to a given curve at any point on it – simple
problems.
5.3 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity
and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
areas, volumesvary with respect to time- illustrative examples.

5.5 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions - Explain the conditions to
find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with illustrative
examples.
5.6 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable- simple problems for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
5.7 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations - simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed
CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 2.8 2.4 2.6 3 2.4 2.4

3 =Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)

Note: The gaps in CO/PO mapping can be met with appropriate activities as follows:
For PO5: Appropriate quiz programmes may be conducted at intervals and duration as
decided by concerned faculty.
For PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
For PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the Library to refer standard
books on Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and
international journals. Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn
mathematical software tools.

48
 PO- CO – Mapping strength
CO periods addressing PO in
Level
PO No Mapped with CO no column I Remarks
(1,2 or 3)
No %
150
1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 100% 3
(31+44+23+34+18) >40% Level 3
80 Highly
2 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 53.3% 3
(8+23+12+22+15) addressed
61 25% to 40%
3 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 40.6% 3
(9+14+9+14+15) Level 2
61 Moderately
4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 40.6% 3
(14+9+9+14+15) addressed
150 5% to 25%
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 100% 3
(31+44+23+34+18) Level 1 Low
62 addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 41.3% 3
(10+14+9+14+15) <5% Not
62 addressed
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 41.3% 3
(10+14+9+14+15)

COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Functions:

Definitions of Set, Ordered pair, Cartesian product of two sets, Relations, Functions, Domain &
Range of functions – One-one and onto functions, inverse of a function.

2. Partial Fractions:

Definitions of rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions
(proper fractions) into partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.

f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax + b)(cx + d ) (ax + b)2 (cx + d )

3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices - Algebra of matrices, equality of two matrices, sum,
difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix, Symmetric,
skew-symmetric matrices-Determinant of a square matrix,Minor and cofactor of an element,
Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants - Singular and non-singular matrices, Adjoint
and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix-System of linear equations in 3 variables-Solutions
by Cramer’s rule and Matrix inversion method.

49
 Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified values,
draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B), cot(A±B), and related identities.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multiple angle A/2.
7. Transformations:
Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa.
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
Sinx =k, cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations and
equations of type a sin x + b cosx=c.
10. Properties of triangles:
Relations between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and
projection rule-area of a triangle.
11. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, modulus, conjugate and amplitude of a complex number -
Arithmeticoperations on complex numbers - Modulus-Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number.

UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
12 Straight lines:Various forms of a straight line - Angle between two lines, perpendicular distance
from a point, intersection of non-parallel lines and distance between parallel lines.
13. Circle:Locus of a point, Circle definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) three non-collinear points of type (0,0), (a,0), (0, b) - General
equation of a circle –its centre and radius.
14. Definition of a conic section - Equation of a conic when focus,directrix and eccentricity
are given - Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus
15. Concept of Limit- Definition and Properties of Limits and Standard Limits-Continuity of a
function at a point.
16. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations- Derivatives of standard
algebraic, logarithmic, exponential, trigonometric, inverse trigonometric, hyperbolic and inverse
hyperbolic functions- Derivatives of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product, quotient of
functions - Chain rule, derivatives of parametric functions, derivatives of implicit functions,
logarithmic differentiation - Second order derivatives - Functions of several variables, first and
second order partial derivatives.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives
17. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of tangent and normal to a curve at any
point.
18.Physicalapplications of derivatives – Velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measurer.

50
19. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing functions,
maxima and minima for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
20.Absolute, relative and percentage errors - Approximate values due to errors in measurements.

Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by
SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand&Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Series.
3. G.B.Thomas, R.L.Finney, Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Addison Wesley, 9th Edition, 1995.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series.
5. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.

-0o0-

51
 C-23
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
No.of periods Total no. of
Course code Course title Marks for FA Marks for SA
per week periods
Engineering
EC-103 03 90 20 80
Physics

No. of Short
No. of Weightage No. of Essay COs
S.No Major topics Answer
Periods of Marks Questions mapped
Questions
1. Units and measurements 09 03 1 0 CO1
2. Statics 11 13 1 1
3. Gravitation 12 20 0 2
4. Concepts of energy 10 13 1 1 CO2
5. Thermal physics 10 13 1 1
6. Sound 12 16 2 1 CO3
7. Electricity &Magnetism 13 16 2 1
8. Modern physics 13 16 2 1 CO4
Total Periods/Marks 90 110 30 80

Course title : Engineering Physics

(1) To understand the basic concepts of physics for various Engineering
applications as required for industries.
Course objectives (2) To equip the students with the scientific advances in technology and make
the student suitable for any industrial or scientific organization.

MATRIX SHOWING MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

Familiarize with various physical quantities, their SI units and

CO1 errors in measurements; understand the concepts of vectors
and various forces in statics.
Understand the concepts of gravitation with reference to
CO2 applications in satellites, provide the knowledge of various
forms of energy and their working principles.
COURSE
Familiarize with the knowledge of transmission of heat and gas
OUTCOMES
CO3 laws; provide the knowledge on musical sound and noise as
pollution and also the concepts of echo and reverberation.
Provide basic knowledge of electricity and concepts of
CO4 magnetism and magnetic materials; familiarize with the
advances in Physics such as photoelectric ell, optical fibers,
semiconductors, superconductors and nanotechnology.

52
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2

Matrix showing mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes

CO-PO Mapping Strength

EC -103 Engineering Physics No of periods 90
CO periods addressing
Level
POs Mapped with CO No PO in Col 1 Remarks
1,2,3
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 44 48.9 % 3 >40% level 3
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO4 11 12.2% 1 (highly addressed)
PO3 CO1, CO2,CO3, CO4 10 11.1% 1
25% to 40% level 2
PO4 CO1, CO2,CO4 8 8.9% 1
(moderately addressed)
PO5 CO2,CO3, CO4 8 8.9% 1
PO6 5% to 25% level 1 (Low
addressed)
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4 9 10.0% 1
< 5%
(not addressed)

3 = strongly mapped, 2 = moderately mapped, 1 = slightly mapped

Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following.
(i) Seminars (ii) Tutorials (iii) Guest Lecturers (iv) Assignments
(v) Quiz competitions (vi) Industrial visits (vii) Tech fest (viii) Mini project
(ix) Group discussions (x) Virtual classes (xi) Library visit for e-books

Learning outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Understand the concept of units and measurements

1.1 Explain the concept of units
1.2 Define t h e t e r m s
a ) Physical quantity, b ) Fundamentalphysical quantities and
c ) D erived physical quantities
1.3 Define unit
1.4 Define fundamental units and derived units

53
1.5 State SI units with symbols for fundamental and some derived quantities
1.6 State Multiples and Submultiples in SI system
1.7 State rules of writing S.I units
1.8 State advantages of SI units
1.9 What are direct and indirect measurements.
1.10 Define accuracy and least count
1.11 Define error in measurement
1.12 Define absolute, relative and percentage errors with their formulae
1.13 Solve simple problems on absolute, relative and percentage errors

2.0 Understand the concepts of statics

2.1 Explain the concept of Vectors
2.2 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples
2.3 Represent vectors geometrically
2.4 Define the types of vectors (equal, negative, unit, co-initial, co-planar, position vector)
2.5 Resolve the vector into rectangular components
2.6 State and explain triangle law of addition of vectors
2.7 Define concurrent forces, co-planar forces and equilibrant.
2.8 State and explain Lami’s theorem
2.9 State the parallelogram law of addition of forces with diagram.
2.10 Write the expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant (no derivation)
2.11 Illustrate parallelogram law with examples (i) flying of bird and (ii) working of sling.
2.12 Define moment of force and couple.
2.13 Write the formulae and S.I units of moment of force and couple.
2.14 Solve simple problems on (i)Resolution of force and
(ii) Parallelogram law of forces (finding R,α and θ).

3.0 Understand the concepts of Gravitation

3.1 State and explain Newton’s universal law of gravitation.
3.2 Define G and mention its value.
3.3 Explain the acceleration due to gravity (g)
3.4 Explain the factors affecting the value of g
3.5 Derive the relationship between g and G.
3.6. State and explain the Kepler’s laws of planetary motion
3.7 Define a satellite.
3.8 What are natural and artificial satellites? Give examples.
3.9 Define orbital velocity and write its formula.
3.10 Define escape velocity and write its formula.
3.11 Write a brief note on Polar satellites.
3.12 Write a brief note on Geo-stationary satellites.
3.13 Mention the applications of artificial satellites.
3.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Newton’s law of gravitation and (ii) calculation of orbital
and escape velocities.

4.0 Understand the concepts of Energy.

4.1 Define work done and energy. Mention their SI units.
4.2 List various types of energy.
4.3 Define P.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.4 Define K.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.5 Derive relationship between K.E and momentum.

54
4.6 State the law of conservation of energy. Give various examples.
4.7 Write a brief note on solar energy.
4.8 Explain the principle of solar thermal conversion.
4.9 Explain the principle of photo voltaic effect
4.10 Solve simple problems on (i) work done (ii) P.E & K.E and (iii) Relation between K.E&
momentum.

5.0 Understand the concepts of thermal physics

5.1 Define the concepts of heat and temperature
5.2 State different modes of transmission of heat
5.3 Explain conduction, convection and radiationwith two examples each.
5.4 State and explain Boyle’s law
5.5 Define absolute zero temperature
5.6 Explain absolute scale of temperature
5.7 State the relationship between degree Celsius, Kelvin and Fahrenheit temperatures
5.8 State Charle’s law and write its equation
5.9 State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its equation
5.10 Define ideal gas
5.11 Derive i deal gas equation
5.12 Explain why universal gas constant (R) is same for all gases
5.13 Calculate the value of R for 1 gram mole of gas.
5.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Interconversion of temperatures between °C, K and F
(ii) Gas laws and (iii) Ideal gas equation.

6.0 Understand the concepts of Sound

6.1 Define the term sound
6.2 Define longitudinal and transverse waves with one example each
6.3 Explain the factors which affect the velocity of sound in air
6.4 Distinguish between musical sound and noise
6.5 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity of sound
6.6 Explain s o u r c e s of noise pollution
6.7 Explain effects of noise pollution
6.8 Explain methods of minimizing noise pollution
6.9 Define Doppler effect.
6.10 List the Applications of Doppler effect
6.11 Define reverberation and reverberation time
6.12 Write Sabine’s formula and name the physical quantities in it.
6.13 Define echoes and explain the condition to hear an echo.
6.14 Mention the methods of reducing an echo
6.15 Mention the applications of an echo
6.16 What are ultrasonics
6.17 Mention the applications of ultrasonics, SONAR
6.18 Solve simple problems on echo

7.0 Understand the concepts of Electricity and Magnetism

7.1 Explain the concept of P.D and EMF
7.2 State Ohm’s law a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a
7.3 E xplain Ohm’slaw
7.4 Define r e s i s ta n c e a n d specific resistance. Write their S.I units.
7.5 State and explain Kichoff’s first law.

55
7.6 State and explain Kirchoff’s second law.
7.7 Describe Wheatstonebridge with legible sketch.
7.8 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge.
7.9 Describe Meter Bridge experiment with necessary circuit diagram.
7.10 Write the formulae to find resistance and specific resistance in meter bridge
7.11 Explain the concept of magnetism
7.12 What are natural and artificial magnets (mention some types)
7.13 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force.
7.14 Write the properties of magnetic lines of force
7.15 State and explain the Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism
7.16 Define magnetic permeability
7.17 Define para, dia, ferro magnetic materials with examples
7.18 Solve simple problems on (i) Ohm’s law (ii) Kirchoff’s first law (iii) Wheatstone bridge (iv) meter
bridge and (v) Coulomb’s inverse square law

8.0 Understand the concepts ofModern physics

8.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect.
8.2 Write Einstein’s Photo electric equation and name the physical quantities in it.
8.3 State laws of photo electric effect
8.4 Explain the Working of photo electric cell
8.5 List the Applications of photoelectric effect
8.6 Recapitulate refraction of light and its laws
8.7 Define critical angle
8.8 Explain the Total Internal Reflection
8.9 Explain the principle and working of Optical Fiber
8.10 List the applications of Optical Fiber
8.11 Explain the energy gap based on band structure
8.12 Distinguish between conductors, semiconductors and insulators based on energy gap
8.13 Define doping
8.14 Explain the concept of hole
8.15 Explain the types of semiconductors: Intrinsic and extrinsic
8.16 Explain n-type and p-type semiconductors
8.17 Mention the applications of semiconductors
8.18 Define superconductor and superconductivity
8.19 List the applications of superconductors
8.20 Nanotechnology definition, nanomaterials and applications

COURSECONTENT

1. Units and measurements

Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental and
derived units - SI units – Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. units-Advantages
of SI units – Direct and indirect measurements – Accuracy and least count – Errors : Absolute,
relative and percentage errors –Problems.

2. Statics
Scalars and Vectors– Representation of a vector - Types of vectors - Resolution of vector into
rectangular components – Triangle law of vectors – Concurrent forces - Lami’s theorem -
Parallelogram law of forces : Statement, equations for magnitude and direction of resultant,
examples – Moment of force and couple – Problems.

56
3. Gravitation
Newton’s law of gravitation and G – Concept of acceleration due to gravity (g) – Factors
affecting the value of g – Relation between g and G- Kepler’s laws – Satellites :
Natural and artificial – Orbital velocity and escape velocity – Polar and
geostationary satellites – Applications of artificial satellites – Problems.
4. Concepts of energy
Work done & Energy-Definition and types of energy - potential energy - kinetic energy-- K.E
and momentum relation – Law of Conservation of energy, examples - Solar energy, principles of
thermal and photo conversion – Problems.
5. Thermal physics
Modes of transmission of heat – Expansion of Gases - Boyle’s law – Absolute scale of
temperature - Thermometric scales and their inter conversion - Charle’s law - Gay-Lussac’s law -
Ideal gas equation - Universal gas constant (R) - Problems.
6. Sound
Sound - Nature of sound - Types of wave motion, Longitudinal and transverse – Factors
affecting the velocity of sound in air - musical sound and noise - Noise pollution – Causes
&effects - Methods of reducing noise pollution - Doppler effect - Echo- Reverberation -
Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula –Ultrasonics& applications – SONAR - Problems.
7. Electricity & Magnetism
Concept of P.D and EMF - Ohm’s law and explanation-Specific resistance -
Kirchoff’slaws – Wheatstone’sbridge - Meter bridge.
Natural and artificial magnets – magnetic field and magnetic lines of force – Coulomb’s
inverse square law – Permeability – Magnetic materials – Para, dia, ferro – Examples –
Problems.
8. Modern Physics
Photoelectric effect – laws of photoelectric effect – photoelectric cell – Applications of
photoelectric cell - Total internal reflection - Fiber optics - Principle and working of an optical
fiber - Applications of optical fibers– Semiconductors : Based on Energy gap – Doping – Hole -
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors (n-type & p-type) – Applications of semiconductors –
Superconductivity – applications – Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.

REFERENCES
1. Intermediate physics - Volume - I & 2 Telugu Academy (English version)
2. Unified physics Volume 1, 2, 3 and 4 Dr. S.L Guptha and SanjeevGuptha
3. Concepts of Physics, Vol 1 & 2 H.C. Verma
4. Text book of physics Volume I & 2 Resnick&Halliday
5. Fundamentals of physics Brijlal&Subramanyam
6. Text book of applied physics Dhanpath Roy
7. NCERT Text Books of physics Class XI & XII Standard
8. e-books/e-tools/websites/Learning Physics software/eLMS
Table showing the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.14
Unit test - 2 From 4.1 to 6.18
Unit test - 3 From 7.1 to 8.20

57
 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Course No. of Periods Total No. Marks for
Course Title Marks for FA
code per week of Periods SA
Engineering Chemistry and
EC-104 3 90 20 80
Environmental Studies

No. of Short
No. of Weightage No. of Essay COs
S.No Unit Title/Chapter Answer
Periods of Marks Questions Mapped
Questions
Fundamentals of
1 14 21 2 1½ CO1
Chemistry
Solutions, Acids and
2 16 21 2 1½ CO1
Bases
3 Electrochemistry 12 13 1 1 CO2
4 Corrosion 8 13 1 1 CO2
5 Water Treatment 8 13 1 1 CO3
Polymers&
6 Engineering 12 13 1 1 CO4
Materials
7 Fuels 6 3 1 0 CO4
Environmental 13 1 1
8 14 CO5
Studies
Total
90 110 30 80
Periods/Marks

Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies

1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the process of various
Engineering Industrial Applications.
Course
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental issues and concerns
Objectives with an interdisciplinary approach that include physical, chemical, biological and
socio cultural aspects of environment.
3. to reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant experiments/exercises

Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole concept, acids and
CO1
bases, PH and Buffer solutions.
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, batteries and corrosion
CO3 Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of hardness in water.
Course Explain the methods of preparation and applications of Polymers and
Outcomes CO4 Elastomers, chemical composition and applications of Alloys, Composite
Materials, Liquid Crystals , Nano Materials and Fuels.
Explain Global impacts due to air pollution, causes , effects and controlling
CO5 methods of water pollution and understand the environment, forest
resources, e-Pollution and Green Chemistry Principles.

58
 EC-104 Engineering. Chemistry and Environmental studies No Of periods 90
CO periods
Mapped with CO addressing Level
POs % remarks
No PO in Col 1,2,3
NO. 1
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3 42 46.7 % 3
>40% level 3 (highly
PO2 CO2,CO3 16 17.8% 1
addressed) 25% to 40%
PO3 CO4 12 13.3% 1
level 2(moderately
PO4 CO4 6 6.7% 1
addressed) 5% to 25% level
PO5 CO5 14 15.5% 1
1 (Low addressed) < 5%(not
PO6
addressed)
PO7

COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7
CO1 3 - - - - - -
CO2 3 1 - - - - -
CO3 3 1 - - - - -
CO4 - - 1 1 - - -
CO5 - - - - 1 - -
Average 3 1 1 1 1 -
3=strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from
the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Atomic structure
1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain t h e s i g n i f i c a n ce o f f o u r Quantum numbers and draw the atomic structures of
Silicon and Germanium.
1.4 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s,p and d-orbitals.
1.5 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 . Pauli’s exclusionprinciple3. Hund’sprinciple.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30.
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding.
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.9 Define and explai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , *H2,*O2 and *N2.(*
Lewis dot method).
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish between
their properties.

2.0 Solutions, Acids and Bases

2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Soluteand 3.Solv ent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on solubility.

59
2.3 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3.Equivalent weight.
Calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids (HCl, H2SO4, H3PO4)
Bases (NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3).
2.4 Define mole and solve numerical problems on mole concept.
2.5 Define molarity, normality and solve numerical problems on molarity and normality.
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality, if weight of solute and volume of solution are given.
b) Calculate the weight of solute, if Molarity or Normality with volume of solution are given.
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated solutions.
2.6 Explain Arrhenius theory f Acids and Bases and give its limitations.
2.7 Define ionic product of water, pH and solve numerical problemson pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
2.8 Define buffer solution and classify buffer solutions with examples. Give its applications.

3.0 Electrochemistry
3.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2.Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–
electrolyte.Give two examples each.
3.2 Distinguish between Metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction.
3.3 Explain electrolysis by taking an example of used NaCl and list out the applications of
electrolysis.
3.4 Define Galvanic cell. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
3.5 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
3.6 Define battery and list the types of batteries with examples.
3.7 Explain the construction, working and applications of i) Dry cell (Leclanche cell), ii) Lead storage
battery, iii) Lithium-Ion battery and iv) Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell.
4.0 Corrosion
4.1 Define the term corrosion.
4.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
4.3 Describe the formation of (a)composition cell (b) stress cell (c)concentration cell during
corrosion.
4.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
4.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion by
(a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings).
(b) Cathodicpro tectio n (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process).

5. 0 Water Treatment
5.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
5.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
5.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water(with Formulae).
5.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L and ppm).
5.6 Solve numerical problems on hardness.
5.7 Explain the methods of softening of hard water by (i) Ion-exchange process and (ii) Reverse
Osmosis process.

6.0 Polymers& Engineering materials.

A) Polymers
6.1 Explain the concept of polymerization.
6.2 Describe the methods of polymerization(a)addition polymerization of ethylene
(b)condensation polymerization of Bakelite (Only flowchart).
6.3 Define plastic. Explain a method of preparation and uses of the following plastics:

60
 1. PVC 2. Teflon3.Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6.
6.4 Define elastomers. Explain a method of preparation and applications of the following:
1. Buna- S 2. Neoprene.
B) Engineering Materials
6.5 Define an alloy. Write the composition and applications of the following:
1.Nichrome2. Duralumin 3.Stainless Steel.
6.6 Define Composite Materials and give any two examples. Statetheir Properties and applications.
6.7 Define Liquid Crystals and give any two examples. State their Properties and applications.
6.8 Define Nano Materials and give any two examples. State their Properties and applications.

7.0 Fuels
7.1 Define the term fuel.
7.2 Classify the fuels based on occurrence.
7.3 Write the composition and uses of the following:
1. LPG 2. CNG 3.Biogas 4.Power alcohol
7.4 Write the commercial production of Hydrogen as future fuel. Give its advantages and
disadvantages.

8.0 Environmental Studies

8.1 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies.
8.2 Define environment. Explain the different segments of environment.
1.Lithosphere2. Hydrosphere3.Atmosphere4. Biosphere
8.3 Define the following terms:
1. Pollutant 2.Pollution 3.Contaminant 4. Receptor 5. Sink 6.Particulates 7.Dissolved oxygen
(DO)8. Threshold Limit Value (TLV) 9. BOD 10.COD 11.Eco
system1 2 . Producers1 3 . C o n s u m e r s 14.Decomposers with examples.
8.4 State the renewable and non- renewable energy sources with examples.
8.5 State the uses of forest resources.
8.6 Explain the causes and effects of deforestation.
8.7 Define air pollution and explain its Global impacts 1. Greenhouseeffect, 2. Ozone layer depletion
and 3. Acidrain.
8.8 Define Water pollution. Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of Water pollution.
8.9 Define e-Pollution, State the sources of e-waste. Explain its health effects and control methods.
8.10 Define Green Chemistry. Write the Principles and benefits of Green Chemistry.

COURSE CONTENT

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentalsof Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers –
Atomic structure of Silicon and Germanium - Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals -
Aufbau’sprinciple - Hund’srule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle -Electronic configuration of
elements.
Chemical Bonding: significance–Electronic theory of valency- Types of chemical bonds – Ionic
and covalent bond with examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds.
2. Solutions, Acids and Bases
Solutions: Types of solutions - Mole concept – Numerical problems on mole concept -Methods
of expressing concentration of a solution – Molarity and Normality – Numerical problems on
molarity and normality.

61
 Acids and Bases: Arrhenius theory of acids and bases – Ionic product of water- pH–Numerical
problems on pH–Buffer solutions – Classification- applications.
3. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – Electrolysis of
fused NaCl–Applications of electrolysis - Galvanic cell – Battery-Types- Dry Cell (Leclanche
Cell),Lead- Storage battery- Lithium-Ion battery -Hydrogen-Oxygen Fuel cell.
4. Corrosion
Introduction - Factors influencing corrosion - Composition, Stress and Concentration Cells–
Rusting of iron and its mechanism – Prevention of corrosion by Protective Coating methods,
Cathodic Protection methods.
5. Water treatment
Introduction– Soft and Hard water– Causes of hardness– Types of hardness– Disadvantages of
hard water – Degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – Numerical problems on hardness -
Softening methods – Ion-Exchange process– Reverse Osmosis process.
6. Polymers & Engineering materials
Polymers:
Concept of polymerization – Types of polymerization – Addition, condensation with
examples – Plastics - Preparation and uses of i).PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene and iv) Nylon 6,6.
Elastomers: Preparation and application of i)Buna-s and ii) Neoprene.
Engineering Materials:
Alloys- Composition and applications of i) Nichrome, ii)Duralumin and iii) Stainless Steel.
Composite Materials- Properties and applications.
Liquid Crystals- Properties and applications.
Nano Materials- Properties and applications.
7. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels – Composition and uses of i) LPG ii) CNG iii) Biogas
and iv) Power alcohol – Hydrogen as a future fuel-production- advantages and disadvantages.
8. EnvironmentalStudies
Scope and importance of environmental studies – Environment - Important terms related to
environment–Renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Forest resources – Deforestation
–Air pollution–Global impacts on environment –Water pollution – causes – effects – control
measures- e-Pollution –Sources of e-waste - Health effects - Control methods - Green Chemistry-
Principles -Benefits.

REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol. 1&2
2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi-Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. D.K.Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test- 1, Unit Test- 2 and Unit Test -3
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 2.8
Unit Test – 2 From 3.1 to 5.7
Unit Test – 3 From 6.1 to 8.10

-0o0-

62
 EC-105, ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA

EC-105 Electronic Components and Devices 05 150 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 Passive Components 20 16 2 1
Switches, Connectors, 20 CO1
2 13 1 1
Relays and PCBs
3 Semiconductor Physics 15 13 1 1
CO2
4 Semiconductor Diodes 15 13 1 1
5 Bipolar Junction 20
13 1 1
Transistor CO3
6 Field Effect Transistor 20 13 1 1
7 Opto Electronic Devices 20 16 2 1 CO4
8 Audio Systems 20 13 1 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 150 110 30 80

1.To learn the principles of passive components, switches, relays and PCBs.
Course 2.To Understand the formation of semiconductor materials and the working of
Objectives semiconductor diode and to analyse the working of BJT and FET.
3.To analyse the working of Special semiconductor devices and to understand the
working of Audio systems.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Familiarize different passive components, switches, relays and describe the
CO1 EC-105.1
PCB manufacturing Techniques and soldering methods.
CO2 EC-105.2 Describe the formation and working of semiconductor diodes
CO3 EC-105.3 Analyse the working of BJT &Reconfigurations
CO4 EC-105.4 Analyse the working of Special Semiconductor Devices.
CO5 EC-105.5 Explain working principle of microphones and loudspeakers.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-105.1 3 3 2 2 1 3 1 1
EC-105.2 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 1
EC-105.3 3 3 2 2 3 1 1
EC-105.4 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 1
EC-105.5 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 2
Average 3 2.8 2.2 2 2 1 1.4 3 1 1.25
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped1=slightly mapped

63
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Passive Components

1.1 i) Define the term resistance
ii) Define the term resistor & classify resistors
iii) Draw the circuit symbols of fixed and variable resistors
iv) List the specifications of a resistor.
1.2 State the physical factors that affect the value of a resistor and calculate resistance value by
using colour Code.
1.3 Compare the features of carbon and wire wound potentiometers.
1.4 Explain the working of rheostat and mention its applications.
1.5 Define temperature co-efficient of resistance and explain the effects of temperature on
resistance.
1.6 Explain the working of thermistor and sensistor and mention their applications.
1.7 i) Define the term inductance.
ii) Define the term inductor & classify inductors.
iii) Draw the circuit symbols of different types of inductors.
iv) List the specifications of an inductor.
v) Define the term Stray inductance.
1.8 List various core materials used in the construction of inductors.
1.9 Explain the use of Ferrites in the construction of high frequency inductors.
1.10 List the applications of A.F. and R.F chokes.
1.11 i) Define the term capacitance.
ii) Define the term capacitor & classify capacitors.
iii) Draw the circuit symbols of fixed and variable capacitors.
iv) List the specifications of a capacitor.
v) Define the term Stray capacitance.
1.12 State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.
1.13 Define Di-electric constant and Di-electric strength of a material.
1.14 State different types of variable capacitors and mention their applications.

2.0 Switches, Connectors, Relays and PCBs

2.1 Classify switches according to poles and throws (SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT, Multi-pole multi-
throw)
2.2 Sketch the I.S.I symbols of various switches.
2.3 State the need of fuse in electronic equipment.
2.4 Mention different types of fuses.
2.5 State the necessity of connectors in electronic circuits.
2.6 List different types of connectors.
2.7 State the use of MCB.
2.8 Define a relay.
2.9 Classify different relays based on principle of operation, polarization and application.
2.10 List the specifications and applications of relays.
2.11 Explain the working of general-purpose electromagnetic relay.
2.12 Explain the need of PCB in electronic equipment.
2.13 Classify PCBs and list the types of laminates used in PCBs.
2.14 List the methods of transferring layout on to the copper clad sheet.
2.15 List the materials used in screen-printing.
2.16 List the steps involved in screen-printing for making PCBs.
2.17 Explain the methods of etching, cleaning and drilling of PCB.

64
2.18 Explain the steps involved in making double-sided PCB.
2.19 Explain Surface Mount Technology and its uses.
2.20 List the materials used in soldering.
2.21 List the soldering methods of PCBs.

3.0 Semiconductor Physics

3.1 Define the terms conductivity and resistivity and give their equations.
3.2 Define Valance band, Conduction band and Forbidden energy gap.
3.3 Explain Energy Band diagrams of conductors, semiconductors and Insulators.
3.4 Define Intrinsic Semiconductors and Fermi level.
3.5 Define electron current and hole current.
3.6 Explain the bipolar nature of semiconductors.
3.7 State the need for doping.
3.8 Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor.
3.9 Explain the formation of P type and N type semiconductor.
3.10 Compare P-type and N-type semiconductors.
3.11 Explain Drift and Diffusion currents.

4.0 Semiconductor Diodes

4.1 Explain the formation of PN junction diode.
4.2 Explain the working of PN junction Diode with forward & reverse biasing.
4.3 Draw the VI characteristics of a diode.
4.4 State diode current equation.
4.5 List the important specifications of a diode.
4.6 Mention the applications of diode.
4.7 Explain reverse breakdown phenomenon.
4.8 Explain the construction and working of Zener diode.
4.9 Draw the forward &reverse bias characteristics of Zener diode.
4.10 Explain Zener breakdown phenomenon.
4.11 Distinguish between Avalanche &Zener breakdowns.
4.12 Mention the applications of Zener diode.
4.13 Explain the working principle of Varactor diode.
4.14 List the applications of varactor diode.

5.0 Bipolar Junction Transistor

5.1 Explain the formation of bipolar junction transistor.
5.2 Explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.
5.3 Draw the circuit symbols of NPN and PNP transistor.
5.4 Draw the different transistor configurations.
5.5 Sketch the input/output characteristics of CB, CE and CC configurations.
5.6 Identify the cut-off, saturation and active regions in output characteristics of CB, CE and CC
Configurations.
5.7 Define alpha, beta and gamma factors.
5.8 Derive the relations among alpha, beta and gamma factors.
5.9 Write collector current expression in CB and CE modes of transistor in terms of α, β, IE, IB, ICand
ICBO, ICEO.
5.10 Compare CB, CE and CC configurations.

6.0 Field Effect Transistor

6.1 Classify Field Effect Transistors.

65
6.2 Explain the construction and working principle of N-channel JFET.
6.3 Draw and explain the drain characteristics of JFET.
6.4 Draw and explain the transfer characteristics of JFET.
6.5 Define the parameters of JFET and obtain the relation among them.
6.6 List the advantages of FET over BJT.
6.7 Explain the construction & working of N-channel Enhancement type MOSFET.
6.8 Explain the construction & working of N-channel Depletion type MOSFET.
6.9 Draw the Drain characteristics of N-channel Depletion MOSFET.
6.10 Compare JFET and MOSFET.

7.0 Opto Electronic Devices

7.1 Explain the principle of LDR and list the applications of LDR.
7.2 Explain the structure, working principle and characteristics of LED.
7.3 List the applications of LED.
7.4 Explain the structure, operation and characteristics of photo diode.
7.5 Explain the structure, operation and characteristics of photo transistor.
7.6 List the applications of photo diode and photo transistor.
7.7 Explain the working of opto-coupler.
7.8 List the applications of opto-couplers.
7.9 Explain the working principle of LCD.
7.10 List the applications of LCD.

8.0 Audio Systems

8.1 Explain the working of carbon, condenser, Crystal and dynamic microphones along with them
polar characteristics.
8.2 Explain the constructional features and principle of operation of PMMC Loudspeaker and its
ratings.
8.3 Mention the use of woofers and tweeters.
8.4 State the need for Horn loud speaker.
8.5 Explain the construction and working of Horn loud speaker with suitable diagram.
8.6 Explain the principle, construction and working of magnetic and crystal headphones and their
uses.
8.7 List the specifications of Loudspeaker and Microphones.
8.8 Define the terms: speech, music and noise.
8.9 Define the terms: Hi-Fi and Stereo related to audio system.
8.10 State the features of home theatre sound system.

COURSE CONTENTS
1. Passive components
Resistors: Resistance, resistor-Classification- Circuit symbols–Specifications-Physical factors- -
Colour code-Carbon and wire wound potentiometers – Rheostat – Applications – Temperature
coefficient of resistance - Effect of temperature on resistance – Thermistors, resistors–
Applications.
Inductors: Inductance, Inductor-Classification - Circuit symbols – Specifications- Stray
inductance - Core materials – Ferrites - AF and RF Chokes.
Capacitors: Capacitance, Capacitor-Classification - Circuit symbols – Specifications –Stray
Capacitance–Factors affecting capacitance- Dielectric constant - Dielectric strength
– Variable capacitors – Applications.

66
2. Switches, Connectors, Relays and PCBs: Switch- Classification – ISI symbols – Fuse – Types –
Necessity of connectors – Types – MCB – Relay – Classification – Specifications –
Applications – General purpose electromagnetic relay.
PCBs: PCB – Classification – Methods of layout preparation - Methods of transferring layout –
Screen printing materials- Steps – Etching, cleaning and drilling - Double sided PCB –
Steps-Materials used in soldering – Soldering methods.
3. Semiconductor Physics: Energy levels, Energy Band Diagrams -compare conductors,
semiconductors and insulators - Valance band, Conduction band and Forbidden energy gap –
Semiconductor Materials – Hole conduction, Bi polar nature of semiconductor materials –
Intrinsic Semiconductors - Extrinsic Semiconductors - P type and N type semiconductors- Drift
and diffusion currents.
4. Semiconductor Diodes: PN junction diode – Working - VI characteristics – Energy band
diagrams- Potential barrier - Diode equation – Manufacturer specifications – Applications
- Breakdown phenomenon – Avalanche and Zener breakdowns - Zener diode construction,
working – Reverse bias characteristics –Applications- working principle of varactor diode-
applications
5. BJT: Transistor formation – PNP & NPN transistors- symbols - Construction – Working - CB, CE
and CC configurations - I/p & O/p characteristics - Active, Cut-off and saturation regions –
Alpha(α), Beta(β), Gamma (γ)factors- Relation- Collector current expression in CB and CE-
Comparison of CB, CE, CC
6. Field Effect Transistor: Classification –N channel JFET Construction, Principle of operation –
Drain characteristics – Mutual characteristics – Parameters of JFET – Relationship -
Advantages of JFET over BJT –N Channel enhancement MOSFET – Construction, working
- N Channel depletion MOSFET – Construction, working - Drain and transfer
characteristics of N channel Depletion MOSFET – Comparison of JFET and MOSFET
7. Opto-Electronic Devices
Construction, working principle of photo diode, photo transistor, LED and their applications-
opto-coupler-working principle of LCD-Applications.
8. Audio systems.
carbon, condenser, Crystal and dynamic microphones- PMMC Loudspeaker- woofers and
tweeters- Horn loud speaker-magnetic and crystal headphones –Specifications of loud speakers,
microphones- speech, music and noise- - Hi-Fi and Stereo- -home theatre sound system.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. G.K. Mithal, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 23rd Edition- Khanna Publication-1988
2. B. Somanathan, Electronic devices and applications, 2nd Edition- PHI.
3. Dr.K. Padmanabham, P. Swaminathan, Electronic components, 2nd Edition, -Laxmi
Publications (P) Ltd
4. Walter c bosshard, Printed circuit boards: design and technology -TMH
5. Bernard Grob, Basic Electronics, 4th edition- TMH-1977
6. Millman&Halkias, Electronic devices & Circuits, 4th edition- TMH

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit Test-II From 3.8 to 6.6
Unit Test-III From 6.7 to 8.10

67
 EC-106, ELEMENTS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-106 Elements of Electrical Engineering 05 150 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Basics of Electrical
1 25 16 2 1
Engineering CO1
2 Basic Electrical circuits 25 16 2 1
3 AC Fundamentals 30 23 1 2 CO2
4 Transformers 20 16 2 1
CO3
5 Motors 17 13 1 1
Measuring and Test
6 18 13 1 1 CO4
Instruments
7 Batteries 15 13 1 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 150 110 30 80

1. To understand the concepts of basic electrical circuits

Course 2. To understand the AC fundamentals
Objectives 3. To learn the practical importance and applications of Transformers
Motors, Measuring instruments, Testing Instruments and batteries

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Explain the concept of electric field and magnetic field.
CO1 EC-106.1
Understand the concept of basic electrical circuits
CO2 EC-106.2 Analyse the AC fundamentals
Explain the transformer principle and applications.
CO3 EC-106.3
Understand the basic principle of DC and AC motors
Explain the construction and working principle of measuring and test
CO4 EC-106.4
instruments
C05 EC-106.5 To understand the construction and working of different batteries

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-106.1 3 2 3 1
EC-106.2 3 3 3 1
EC-106.3 3 1 3 3 3 1
EC-106.4 3 2 3 3 1 3 1 1
EC-106.5 3 2 3 1 3 1
Average 3 2 3 3 1.67 3 1 1
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

68
 LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Basics of Electrical Engineering
1.1 Explain the concept of lines of force & magnetic Field.
1.2 Define the terms magnetic field intensity, magnetic potential, Magnetic Flux, magnetic flux
density.
1.3 Define the terms absolute permeability and relative permeability.
1.4 State Faraday’s laws of electro - magnetic induction.
1.5 Explain dynamically and statically induced E.M.F.
1.6 Define the term self-inductance, mutual inductance and co-efficient of coupling.
1.7 i) State expression for equivalent inductance of inductors connected in series and solve
simple problems.
1.8 ii) State expression for equivalent inductance of inductors connected in parallel and solve
simple problems.
1.9 Explain the concept of electrostatic field.
1.10 Define the terms absolute permittivity and relative permittivity.
1.11 Define the terms electric potential and potential difference, voltage, current and power.
1.12 Define the terms electric field intensity, electric flux, electric flux density.
1.13 i) State expression for equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected in series and solve
simple problems.
1.14 ii) State expression for equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected in parallel and solve
simple problems.
1.15 Explain charging and discharging of capacitor.

2.0 Basic Electrical circuits

2.1 Distinguish between active and passive elements.
2.2 Explain the terms Ideal voltage source and Ideal current source.
2.3 State Ohm’s Law and its limitations.
2.4 State Kirchhoff’s current law and Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
2.5 Derive an expression for equivalent resistance of resistors connected in series.
2.6 Derive an expression for equivalent resistance of resistors connected in parallel.
2.7 Explain current division rule for a two-branch parallel resistive network.
2.8 Solve simple problems on current division rule.

3.0 AC fundamentals
3.1 Explain the effect of AC flowing through Pure Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance with
vector diagrams.
3.2 Explain mathematical representation of vectors in a) symbolic notation b) trigonometric c)
exponential and polar forms.
3.3 Define the terms reactance, Impedance, admittance, conductance and power factor.
3.4 Explain active and reactive components of AC current.
3.5 Explain active, reactive and apparent power in AC circuit.
3.6 Define Q factor of a coil.
3.7 Explain series RL, RC and RLC circuits.
3.8 Solve problems on series RL and RC circuits.
3.9 Explain parallel RL, RC and RLC circuits.

69
 3.10 Explain admittance method for solving parallel RL, RC and RLC circuits.

4.0 Transformers
4.1 Explain the working principle of transformer.
4.2 Classify transformers based on power rating, construction and applications.
4.3 Give reasons for using laminations in transformer core.
4.4 State voltage transformation ratio.
4.5 Explain the losses in a transformer.
4.6 Define efficiency and regulation of transformer.
4.7 Explain the construction and working of an auto transformer.
4.8 Explain the applications of transformer as
a) Potential transformer.
b) Current transformer.
c) Impedance matching transformer.
d) Isolation transformer.
4.9 List important specifications of a transformer.

5.0 Motors
5.1 Explain the principle of operation of DC Motor.
5.2 Explain the significance of back EMF.
5.3 State the equations for speed of
a) DC series motor b) DC shunt motor
5.4 Compare DC series motor and DC shunt motor.
5.5 List specifications of DC motor.
5.6 Explain the need for starter.
5.7 Explain the principle of operation of single-phase induction motor.
5.8 Explain the principle of operation of stepper motor.
5.9 List the applications of stepper motor.
6.0 Measuring and Test Instruments
6.1 List the characteristics of ideal voltmeter and ideal Ammeter.
6.2 Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument.
6.3 Explain the working of rectifier type voltmeter.
6.4 List the advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
6.5 Explain the working of Ramp type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
6.6 State the use of analog/digital multimeters.
6.7 State the specifications of digital multimeters such as Accuracy, Resolution, Range, Precision,
and Display Digits.
6.8 Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.

7.0 Batteries
7.1 Define the terms ‘Cell’ and ‘battery’.
7.2 State the differences between Cells and Batteries.
7.3 Classify different types of batteries.
7.4 Explain the construction and working of sealed Lead Acid battery.
7.5 List the advantages, limitations and applications of Lead acid batteries.

70
7.6 Explain the working Principle of Nickel-cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries
7.7 List the advantages, limitations and applications of Ni-Cd Batteries.
7.8 Explain the construction and working of lithium-ion batteries
7.9 List the applications of Lithium-ion batteries.
7.10 State the important technical specifications of batteries.

COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Basics of Electrical Engineering
Concept of lines of force & magnetic Field –Magnetic field intensity, Magnetic potential, Flux ,
Magnetic Flux density - Absolute permeability and relative permeability - Faraday’s laws of
electro - magnetic induction - Dynamically and statically induced E.M.F.- Self-inductance
,mutual inductance and co-efficient of coupling- Equivalent inductance of inductors connected
in series/parallel– Simple problems – Electrostatic field- Absolute permittivity and relative
permittivity-Electric potential, potential difference, voltage, current and power- Electric field
intensity – Electric flux – Electric flux density - Equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected
in series/parallel - Simple problems - Charging and discharging of capacitor

2.0 Basic Electrical circuits

Active and passive elements-Ideal voltage source and Ideal current source- Ohm’s Law –
Limitations - Kirchhoff’s current law and Kirchhoff’s voltage law-Equivalent resistance of
resistors connected in series/parallel- Current division rule for a two-branch parallel resistive
network –Simple problems

3.0 AC fundamentals
Effect of AC flowing through Pure Resistance , Inductance and Capacitance with vector
diagrams-Mathematical representation of vectors a) symbolic notation ,b) trigonometric c)
exponential and polar forms - Reactance, Impedance, admittance, conductance and Power
Factor- Active and Reactive components of AC current- Active and Reactive and apparent
power - Q factor of a coil –Series RL,RC,RLC circuits with AC supply - AC through RL-RC circuits-
problems on RL,RC circuits-Parallel AC circuit containing RLC- Admittance method for solving
AC parallel circuits.

4.0 Transformers
Principle of transformer –Classifications-Reasons for using laminations- Voltage transformation
ratio-Losses in transformer- Efficiency and regulation of transformer - Auto transformer-
Applications of transformer-Specifications of transformer

5.0 Motors
Principle of D.C. motors- Significance of back E.M.F.- Equation for speed of DC motors (Series &
Shunt) - Specifications of DC motor–Starter-Single phase induction motor, - Stepper motor

6.0 Measuring and Test Instruments

Characteristics of ideal voltmeter and ideal Ammeter - Construction and principle of operation
of PMMC instrument-Rectifier type voltmeter-Advantages of digital instruments over analog
instruments- Ramp type digital voltmeter – multimeter-specifications of digital multimeter -
Function generator.

71
7.0 Batteries
Battery- Classification of batteries-Sealed Lead Acid battery- Nickel-cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries-
lithium-ion batteries- advantages, limitations and applications of different batteries-technical
specifications of batteries

REFERENCEBOOKS

1. V K mehata, RohitMehata, Basic electrical engineering-S.Chand Publication

2. D P Kothari, I J Nagrath, Basic electrical engineering, 4th edition- TMH
3. B.L. Thereja, A Text Book of Electrical Technology volume –II -S. Chand
4. Dr. P S Bimbhra, Electrical Machines- Khanna Publication
5. HS Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill
6. T R Crompton, “Battery Reference Book-3 rd. Edition”, Newness- Reed Educational and
Professional Publishing Ltd.,
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.8
Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 4.9
Unit Test-III From 5.1 to 7.10

-0o0-

72
 EC-107, ENGINEERING DRAWING
No. of periods Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
/week periods
Engineering
EC-107 3 90 40 60
Drawing

No. of
No. of
S. No. of Weightage Short CO’s
Unit Title Essay
No periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Use of Drawing
Instruments, Free Hand
1 10 10 2 - CO1
Lettering and
Dimensioning Practice
Principles of Geometric
2 15 15 1 1 CO2
Constructions
Projections of points, lines,
3 20 25 1 2 CO3
planes and solids
4 Sectional Views 20 10 - 1 CO4
5 Orthographic projection 25 20 - 2 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 90 80 20 60

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
Course Objectives the basic graphic skills and use them in preparation, reading and
interpretation of engineering drawings.

Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments and Familiarise

CO1 EC-107.1
with the conventions to be followed in engineering drawing as per BIS
Course CO2 EC-107.2 Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering curves
Outcomes Visualise and draw the projections of i) Points ii) Lines iii) Regular
CO3 EC-107.3
Planes iv) Regular Solids
CO4 EC-107.4 Visualise and draw the sectional views of components
CO5 EC-107.5 Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of components
PO-CO Mapping
EC-107 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 1
AVERAGE 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 1
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low

73
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium.
1.2 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves.
1.3 Use correct grade of pencil and other instruments to draw different types of lines and for
different purposes
1.4 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
1.5 Write titles using vertical and slopping (inclined) lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and
14mm height.
1.6 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
1.7 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of dimensioning.

2.0 Principles of Geometric Constructions

2.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts.
i) Exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles.
ii) Tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs.
2.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given.
i) Inscribing circle radius is given. ii) describing circle radius is given
2.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid.

3.0 Projections of points, lines, planes and solids (All in first quadrant only)
3.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections.
3.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP & VP)
3.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two references.
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to another plane).
3.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to another plane).
3.5 Visualise and draw the projections of regular solids like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder, and Cone
(up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and inclined to another plane).

4.0 Sectional Views

4.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
4.2 Draw sectional views of regular solids by applying the principles of hatching.

5.0 Orthographic projection

5.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
5.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given object fully.

74
 Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

S. No Major topic Key Competency

• Explain the linkages between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study in
Diploma course.
• Select the correct instruments to draw
Use of Drawing Instruments, Free various entities in different orientation.
1.
Hand Lettering and Dimensioning • Write titles using sloping and vertical
Practice lettering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of
Indian standards).
• Dimension a given drawing using standard
notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
• Dividing a line into equal parts, tangents to
2. Geometrical construction circles, Construct involute, cycloid from the
given data.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes & • Draw the projections of points, straight lines,
3. planes & solids with respect to reference
Solids
planes (HP& VP).
• Differentiate between true shape and
apparent shape of section
4. Sectional Views
• Apply principles of hatching.
• Draw simple sections of regular solids
5. Orthographic Projection • Draw the minimum number of views needed
to represent a given object fully.

COURSE CONTENTS:

NOTES: 1. B.I. S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.

2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.

1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice

Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing. Its importance as
a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education - Basic Tools, tools for drawing–
Mentioning of names under each classification and their brief description -Scales:
Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness -
Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of
A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing
Sheet,

Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering Practicing of letters &
numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)-Advantages of single stroke or simple style of
lettering - Use of lettering stencils- Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in
dimensioning -Shape description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size
description -Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of

75
 dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes,
rules to be observed in the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and
unidirectional system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined
progressive, and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard,
features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.

2.0 Geometric Constructions

Division of a straight line into given number of equal parts –Drawing interior and exterior
tangents to two circles of given radii and centre distance-Drawing tangent arc of given radius to
touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right and obtuse angles), Tangent arc of given
radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line, Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given
circles internally and externally-Construction of any regular polygon by general method for given
side length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscripting circle radius - Involute, Cycloid,
explanations as locus of a moving point, their engineering application, viz., Gear tooth profile,
screw threads, springs etc. – their construction.

3.0 Projection of points, lines and planes and Solids (All in first quadrant only)
Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection, Reference Planes,
Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third angle
Projections of points -Projections of straight line –(a) Parallel to both the planes,
(b)Perpendicular to one of the planes and (c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes-
Projections of regular planes-(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes, (b) Plane
perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa- Projections of regular solids- (a) Axis
perpendicular to one of the planes, (b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.

4.0 Sectional Views

Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular solids
inclined to one plane and parallel to another plane.

5.0 Orthographic Projections

Meaning of orthographic projection - Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of
engineering objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First
angle projection -Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of meter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method of
representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an object fully.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – (McGraw-Hill)
2 Engineering Drawing by BasantAgarwal& C.M Agarwal - (McGraw-Hill)
3 Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.
4 T.S.M. & S.S.M on “Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
5 SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.

Table specifying syllabus to be covered for UNIT TEST I, II and III.

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered
Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.3
Unit Test – II From 3.1 to 3.5
Unit Test – III From 4.1 to 5.2

76
 EC-108, ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS AND DEVICES LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA

Electronic Components and Devices

EC-108 03 90 40 60
Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Identifying different electronic components 06 CO1
2 Soldering practice and Preparation of PCB 24 CO2
3 Study and use of electronic equipment 21 CO3
Testing, obtaining characteristics of 33
4 CO4
electronic devices
5 PA system 06 CO5
Total 90

To have hands on practice on Soldering, de-soldering of circuits.

To have practice on preparation of PCB for given circuits.
Course To get acquainted with the usage of electronic equipment.
Objectives
To test electronicdevices and obtain their characteristics.
To arrange PA system with different loudspeakers and microphones.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-108.1 Practice on Soldering, de-soldering of circuits.
CO2 EC-108.2 Preparation of PCB for given circuits.
CO3 EC-108.3 Operating different electronic equipment.
CO4 EC-108.4 Plot the characteristics of electronic devices.
CO5 EC-108.5 Familiarise with PA system.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-108.1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
EC-108.2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1
EC-108.3 3 2 2 3 3 2
EC-108.4 3 2 2 2 3 2
EC-108.5 3 2 2 3 3 2
Average 3 2 1 2.25 2.5 2 3 2 2
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

77
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Identify different Electronic Components and devices

a) Identify the components, and its terminals, and test:
i) Colour coded resistors, different fixed and variable type resistors, different Inductors-
different types of capacitors: ceramic, disc, paper, mica, gang etc.
ii) Different SMD resistors, SMD inductors, SMD capacitors
iii) Diodes, Transistors, JFETs, MOSFETs
iv) Relays, Switches –SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT- Toggle-Push button –Rotary-Slider –Thumb
Wheel
v) Diode, transistor & IC’s SMD packages (SOT, PLCC),
vi) Different LEDs-Red LED, Blue LED, Green LED, Bi colour LED, Infrared LED, different sizes
and forms, their specifications
b) Familiarise with
i) Bread Board
ii) Bridge rectifier as a device,
iii) DC to DC (Ex: 12V to 5V) converter as a device,
iv) Temperature controlled Soldering station,
v) Programmable Regulated power supply
2.0 Soldering practice and Preparation of PCB
a) Familiarise with Temperature controlled Soldering Station.
b) Technique of using soldering iron, Soldering different components and ICs.
c) Soldering components on to general purpose PCB as per the given circuit diagram.
d) Technique of de-soldering using de-soldering pump and wick.
e) Draw PCB for simple circuits and etch them on to a copper clad sheet.
f) Preparing PCB for the given circuit.
3.0 Study and use of electronic equipment
a) Study of AC/DC voltmeter, AC/DC ammeter, ohm meter, analogmultimeter, digital multi
meter.
b) Study of RPS unit, CRO, Function Generator using their manuals and familiarise with the
operation of each equipment.
c) i)Measure Resistance using multimeter and compare with the calculated value using the
colour code.

78
 ii) Measure L and C using digital LCR meter and compare with the calculated value using the
code.
1.0 Testing and obtaining characteristics of electronic devices
a) Obtain VI characteristics of PN junction diode.
b) Obtain VI characteristics of Zener diode.
c) Obtain i/p and o/p characteristics of a transistor in CE configurations.
d) Obtain VI characteristics of photo diode.
e) Obtain the VI characteristics of Photo transistor.
f) Obtain VI characteristics of LDR.
g) Control a load using relay
i)Turn on and Off DC load (LED/Buzzer/DC motor)
ii) Turn On and Off AC load (Bulb/Tube light/Fan)
h) Obtain drain characteristics of JFET
5.0 Testing of Loudspeakers and arranging PA system
a) Measure the input impedance of Loud Speakers
b) Arrange PA system with multi speakers and microphones (with cord and cordless)

-O0O-

79
 PHYSICS LAB
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-109 Physics Lab 1.5 45 20 30

(1) To provide strong practical knowledge of Physics to serve as a tool for

various device applications in Engineering.
Course Objectives (2) To enhance scientific skills of the students by incorporating new
experiments so as to enrich the technical expertise of the students as
required for industries.

Improving accuracy in various measurements; understanding the

CO1
nature of the forces keeping the body in equilibrium.
Estimating the acceleration caused by the gravity of earth; Practical
CO2
study of the concepts of refraction of light at curved/plane surface
Understanding the pressure of the gas as function of its volume;
COURSE study of the combined magnetic field of the earth and an artificial
CO3
OUTCOMES magnet to estimate its pole strength; Estimating the velocity of
sound in air through resonance phenomenon.
Applying Kirchoff’s laws to evaluate the specific resistance of a wire;
Study of exchange of heat from system to surrounding by graphical
CO4
analysis; Conversion of light energy to micro currents as potential
engineering application.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2

CO-PO Mapping Strength

EC -109 Engineering Physics Lab No of periods 90
CO periods addressing
Level
POs Mapped with CO No PO in Col 1 Remarks
1,2,3
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 15 33.3 % 2 >40% level 3
PO2 CO1,CO3, CO4 8 17.8% 1 (highly addressed)
PO3 CO1, CO2,CO4 6 13.3% 1
25% to 40% level 2
PO4 CO1, CO2 3 6.7% 1
(moderately addressed)
PO5 CO1,CO2, CO3 5 11.1% 1
PO6 CO1, CO2,CO4 3 6.7% 1 5% to 25% level 1 (Low
addressed)
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO4 5 11.1% 1
< 5%(not addressed)
3 = strongly mapped, 2 = moderately mapped, 1 = slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from
thefollowing.

80
 (i) Seminars (ii) Viva-voce (iii) Assignments
(iv) Quiz competitions (v) Industrial visits (vi) Tech fest (vii) Mini project
(viii) Group discussions (ix) Virtual labs (x) Library visit for e-books

TIMESCHEDULE
S.No List of experiments No.of
1. Verniercalipers Periods
03
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03
3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03
4. Determination of ‘g’ using simple pendulum 03
5. Focal length and focal power of convex lens 03
6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03
7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
8 Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic field lines 03
9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03
Experiments for demonstration
10 Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a wire 03
11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03
12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total: 45

LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice with Verniercalipers to determine the volumes of cylinder and sphere.
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate and cross sectionalarea of
a wire.
3.0 Verify the Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces.
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity (g) using Simple Pendulum. To verify the
result from l-T2 graph.
5.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lens using distant object method and U-
V method. To verify the result from U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods.
6.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope
7.0 Verify the Boyle’s law using Quill tube. To draw a graph between P and 1/l.
8.0 Determination of magnetic pole strength of a bar magnet by drawing magnetic lines offorce
and locating null points (either N - N or N - S method)
9.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero
degreeCentigrade using resonance apparatus.
10.0 Determine the resistance and specific resistance of material of a wire using Meter Bridge
11.0 To verify the Newton’s law of cooling.
12.0 To study the characteristics of photo electric cell.

81
 Course Outcomes

S.No List of experiments No.of COs

1. Verniercalipers Periods
03
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03 CO1

3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03

4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03
5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03 CO2

6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03

7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
8 Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic 03 CO3

9 field lines apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air

Resonance 03
10 Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a 03
11 wire
Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03 CO4

12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03

Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
Experiment Competencies Key competencies

• Find the Least count • Read the scales

1 . Practice(Nu
on • Fix the specimen in position • Calculate the requisite
Vernier
(Number • Read the scales physical quantities of
Calipers (03) • Calculate the physical quantities of given objects
(No of Periods) given object • Calculating volumes of the
cylinder and sphere

• Find the Least count • Read the scales

• Fix the specimen in • Noting zero error
position • Calculate thickness of given
2. Practice on Screw • Read the scales glass plate
gauge(03) • Calculate thickness of glass plate • Calculate cross section of
and cross section of wire from wire from radius
radius

• Making experimental set up • Measuring angles

• Fix suitable weights between the forces
• Note the positions of threads on • Marking the directions
3. Verification of drawing sheet of forces on a paper
Lami’s theorem • Find the angles between the • Verifying Lami’s theorem
forces(03) concurrent forces from the weights and
• Changing weights appropriately measured angles
• Verify Lami’s theorem between the forces.

82
 • Fix the simple pendulum to the • Find the time for number of
stand oscillations
• Adjust the length of pendulum • Find the time period
• Find the time for number of • Calculate the acceleration
4. Simple oscillations (say 20) due to gravity
pendulum(03)
• Find the time period • Verify form l-T2 graph
• Calculate the acceleration due to
gravity
• Draw l-T2 graph
• Fix the object distance • Find focal length from
• Find the Image distance distant object method.
5. Focal length and
• Calculate the focal length and • Calculate the focal length
Focal power of
power of convex lens and power of convex lens
convex lens (03)
• Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v graphs • Verify result from u-v and
1/u – 1/v graphs
• Find the least count of Vernier on • Reading the scales on
microscope Microscope.
• Place the graph paper below • Fiding real and apparent
6 Refractive index
microscope thickness of the slab
of solid using
• Read the scales • Calculate the refractive
traveling
• Calculate the refractive index of index of glass slab
microscope(03)
glass slab
• Fixing Quill tube in various
• Note the atmospheric pressure positions on retort stand.
• Fix the Quill tube to retort stand • Find the length of air
column
• Find the length of air column
7 . Boyle’s law • Find the pressure of
• Find the pressure of enclosed air
verification (03) enclosed air
• Find and compare the calculated
• Find the values of Px l
values of P x l
• Verify Boyle’s law.

• Draw magnetic meridian • Draw the pattern of

8. Mapping of • Place the bar magnet in N-N magnetic lines of force
magnet lines of or N-S directions • Locate the neutral points
force (03) • Draw magnetic lines of force • Calculating pole strength of
• Locate the neutral points the bar magnet

• Arrange the resonance apparatus • Adjust the reservoir level

• Adjust the reservoir level for • Find the first and second
9. Velocity of sound booming sound resonanting lengths
in air • Find the first and second • Calculate velocity of sound
– Resonance resonanting lengths at room temperature and
method (03) • Calculate velocity of sound . at 00 C

83
 • Make the circuit connections • Making connections as per
• Find the balancing length circuit diagram.
• Calculate unknown resistance • Find the balancing length
10. Meter
• Find the radius of wire • Calculate unknown
bridge(03)
• Calculate the specific resistance
resistance • Calculate the specific
resistance of the given wire
• Heating liquid in a beaker • Measuring temperature of
using a heating element a liquid as function of time.
• Inserting thermometer in liquid in • Plotting a cooling curve.
calorimeter • Verifying Newton’s law of
11. Verification of • Stirring liquid cooling.
Newton’s law of • Measuring temperatures as a
Cooling (03) function of time using
thermometer
• Plotting a cooling curve

• Experimental set up and making • Making connections for

connections experimental set up.
• Veryfying intensity of light by • Varying distances
12. Photo electric
varying distances between light appropriately
cell – Study of its
source and photocell. • Measuring Voltage and
Characteristics (03)
• Measuring Voltage and current current values.
values. • Study of V- I Characteristics
form graph.

Scheme of Valuation for EndPractical Examination

Activity Marks
For writing, Apparatus, formulae, least count (if applicable) 5
Procedure & precautions 5
Drawing Tables 3
Readings, calculations, graph (if applicable), reporting the findings 12
Viva-voce 5
Total marks 30

84
 CHEMISTRYLABORATORY
(C-23 curriculum common to all Branches)

CHEMISTRYLAB
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-110 Chemistry Lab 1.5 45 20 30

Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of standard

CO1
solution.
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration.
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction.
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation.
Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with instrument
CO5
for investigation of water pollution parameters.

PO- CO mapping
Chemistry Laboratory
EC-110 No. of periods : 45
No. of CO’s:5
CO periods
Mapped with CO addressing Level
POs % Remarks
No. PO in Col. 1,2,3
No. 1
CO1,CO2,CO3, >40%
PO1 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5 Level 3 (highly
CO1,CO2,CO3, addressed)
PO2 9 20 1
CO4,CO5
PO3 25% to 40%
CO1,CO2,CO3, Level2 (moderately
PO4 12 26.66 2 addressed)
CO4,CO5
CO2,CO3, 5% to 25%
PO5 12 26.66 2 Level1 (Low addressed)
CO4,CO5
PO6
< 5%(not addressed)
PO7

COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 1 - 2 - - - - - -
CO2 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - -
CO3 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - -
CO4 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - -
CO5 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - -
3=strongly mapped2= moderately mapped1= slightly mapped

85
 Note:The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities
from the following: i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz
competitionsvi) Industrial visit vii) Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual
classes xi) Library visit for e-books

TIMESCHEDULE
No.ofPeriod Mapped
S.No Name of the Experiment
s with COs
a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
1. laboratory by senses. 03 CO1
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetricanalysis.
2. Preparation of Std.Na2CO3solution and making solutions of different dilutions 03 CO1
3. EstimationofHClsolutionusingStd.Na2CO3solution. 03 CO2
4. EstimationofNaOHusingStd.HClsolution. 03 CO2
5. Determinationofacidityofwatersample. 03 03 CO2 CO2
6. Determinationofalkalinityofwatersample. 03 03 CO2 CO2
7. EstimationofMohr’sSalt usingStd.KMnO4. Solution. 03 CO3
8. Estimation of Ferrous ion by using Std. K2Cr2O7solution. 03 CO3
9. Determinationoftotalhardnessofwatersample usingStd.EDTAsolution. 03 CO4
10. EstimationofChloridespresentinwatersample by usingStd. AgNO3 solution. 03 CO4
11. EstimationofDissolvedOxygen(D.O)inwatersampleby using Std. hypo solution. 03 CO5
12. Determinationof pH usingpHmeter.. 03 CO5
13. Determinationofconductivityofwater and adjusting ionic strength required level. 03 CO5
.
14. Determinationofturbidityofwater. 03 CO5
15. Estimationoftotalsolidspresentinwatersample. 03 CO5
Total: 45

86
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.

Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask, burettes)
and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor estimation of
HCl.
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.HClsolution for estimation of
NaOH.
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available).
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water).
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4 solutionfor estimation of
Mohr’sSalt.
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.K2Cr2O7 solutionfor estimation of
Ferrous ion.
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution.
10. Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chloridespresent in the given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. AgNO3 solution.
11. Conduct the test using titrimetric / electrometric method to determine. Dissolved Oxygen (D.O)
in the given water samples (One sample from closed containerand one from open container /
tap water) by Std. Hypo solution.
12. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter.
13. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions.
a) to determine conductivity.
b) to adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value.
14. Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non-coloured)to determine their
turbidity in NTU.
15. Determine the total solids present in given samples of water(One ground water and one surface
/ tap water).

87
 Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment
Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)

Recognition of chemical substances and solutions.

-
Familiarization of methods for Volumetricanalysis.
--
(03)

▪ Weighing the ▪ Weighing the

salt to the salt to the
accuracy of .01 accuracy of 0.01
Preparation of Std.Na2CO3 solutionand making solutions mg. mg.
of different dilutions. (03) ▪ Measuring the ▪ Measuring the
water with water with
volumetric flask, volumetric flask,
measuring jar, measuring jar,
▪ Cleaning
volumetric the volumetric
EstimationofHClsolution usingStd. Na2CO3solution. (03) pipetteandand
glassware pipette and
graduated
rinsing with graduated
pipette.
appropriate pipette.
Estimationof NaOHusingStd.HClsolution. (03) ▪ solutions.
Making ▪ Making
▪ Making
appropriate appropriate
Determinationofacidityofwatersample. (03) dilutions.
standard ▪ dilutions.
Making
solutions. standard
▪ Measuring solutions.
Determinationofalkalinityofwatersample. (03)
accurately the ▪ Measuring
standard accurately the
solutions and standard
EstimationofMohr’sSalt usingStd.KMnO4solution. (03)
titrants. solutions and
▪ Filling the titrants.
Estimation of Ferrous ion by using Std.K2Cr2O7.solution burette with ▪ Effectively
(03) titrant. Controlling the
▪ Fixing the flow of the
burette to the titrant.
DeterminationoftotalhardnessofwaterusingStd.EDTAsol
stand. ▪ Identifying the
ution. (03)
▪ Effectively end point.
Controlling the ▪ Making accurate
flow of the observations.
EstimationofChloridespresentinwatersample using Std.
titrant.
AgNO3 solution (03)
▪ Identifying the
end point.
▪ Making accurate
EstimationofDissolvedOxygen(D.O)inwatersample (By observations.
titration method) (03) ▪ Calculating the
results.
▪ Familiarize ▪ Prepare
DeterminationofpHusingpHmeter. (03) with standard

88
 instrument. solutions /
Determinationofconductivityofwater and adjusting ionic ▪ Choose buffers, etc.
strength to required level. (03) appropriate ▪ Standardize
‘Mode’ / the
‘Unit’. instrument
▪ Prepare with
standard appropriate
Determinationofturbidityofwater. (03)
solutions / standard
buffers, etc. solutions.
▪ Standardize ▪ Plot the
▪ the
Measuring ▪ standard
Measuring
instrument
the accurate curve.
the accurate
with
volume and ▪ Make and
volume
appropriate
weight of measureme
weight of
Estimationoftotalsolidspresentinwatersample. (03)
standard
sample. nts
sample.
▪ solutions.and
Filtering ▪ accurately.
Filtering and
▪ Plotdrying
air the air drying
standard
without without
curve. any
losing losing any
SCHEME OF VALUATION ▪ Make
filtrate. filtrate.
▪ measureme
Accurately ▪ Accurately
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus,principle and procedure. nts
weighing 5M
the weighing the
B) Demonstrated competencies. accurately.
filter 20M
paper, filter paper,
Making standard solutions. ▪ Follow
crucible and crucible and
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants. Safety
filtrate. filtrate.
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant. ▪ precautions.
Drying the
Identifying the end point. crucible in
Making accurate observations. an oven.
C) Viva-voce. 5M

Total 30M

----

89
 EC-111, COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALSLABORATORY
(C-23 curriculum common to all Branches)

Course No. of Total No. of

Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
EC-111
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)

Time schedule:
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions No. of Periods
each of 3 periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90

i)To know Hardware Basics

ii)To familiarize operating systems
Course
iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
Objectives
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.

At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 EC-111.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 EC-111.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word
processing software
Course
CO3 EC-111.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes
various graphs / charts.
CO4 EC-111.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation for a
given theme or topic.
CO5 EC-111.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop

90
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-111.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
EC-111.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
EC-111.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
EC-111.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
EC-111.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a) To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b) To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c)To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation

91
 25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop
33. To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.

Key competencies:
Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to
Computer system and computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
Start menu

b. Access application programs b. Use taskbar and

using Start menu, Task Task manager
manager

92
 c. Use Help support

2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed the details

3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your computer speed manager and find
b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar

4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename,
arrange and search
b. Use copy / paste move for the required
commands to organize files folder/file
and folders

c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files

Working with Files and size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Folders d. Search a file or folder and find
Continued.... its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin

93
5. To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
Accessories: Calculator accessories and
Calculator – Notepad – b. Access Calculatorusing Run select correct text
WordPad – MS Paint command editor based on the
c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create .jpeg, and save in the
.bmp files using MS Paint required format.

6. To familiarize with Ribbon a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document

layout of MS word. – b. Use Save and Save as features and name
Home – Insert- page c. Work on two Word appropriately and
layout- References-Review- documents simultaneously save
View d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
Printing options print options

7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and

Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace features c. Use spell check/
in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar

8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers

9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of rows fields – Deleting rows and word document and
and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools

94
 d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order

10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.

11. To Use Mail merge feature a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.

12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical

symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical equations document
in the document
13. To Practice with MS-EXCEL a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spreadsheetand familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available
Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- in toolbar
Formula Bar-Status Bar

14. To access and Enter data in a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a addressing
File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit

15. To edit spread sheet Copy, a. Insert and Delete Columns and Format the excel
Cut, Paste, and selecting Rows-Create Borders-Merge sheet
cells and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change

95
 the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in Enter formula for
Formulae automatic calculations
c. Use Automatic updating
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help

18. To Create Excel Functions, a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if, Count involving cross
and CountIf Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and

graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports of Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet in a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Excel, page setup and print b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers

96
 symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Ribbon Use various options in Access required
layout &features of PowerPoint options in the tool bar
PowerPoint 2007. a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint Presentation PowerPoint PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide in a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
PowerPoint and add notes Template and format
b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation

26. To Insert Text and Objects a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart Use 3d features
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art

97
 c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend

29. To insert a Charts/Graphs a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
Add narration to the slide b. Adjust the volume in the appropriate
settings format.
c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
supported by PowerPoint in a the slide
slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to
options different slides
e. Add narration to the slide and files
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects
effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool slide show
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out

98
33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color& Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool

34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image

b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including graphics
and text
35 To insert Borders around a. Start with a single background Able to create a
photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas add visual interest to
d. Create a border color a photo
e. Send the border color to the
back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background of a a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.

99
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using: Able to control color
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool saturation
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment
layer tool

38 To prepare a cover page for a. opens a file with height 500 Able to prepare cover
the book in subject area and width 400 for the cover page for the book
page.
b. apply two different colors to
work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options

39 To adjust the brightness a. opens a file. Able to control

and contrast of picture to b. Go to image→ adjustments→ brightness/contrast.
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.
c. adjust the brightness and
contrast.
d. Save the image.

40 To type a word and apply a. open a file Able to apply shadow

the shadow emboss effects b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
Unit test-2 From 9 to 22
Unit test-3 From 23 to 40

100
 EC-112, ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LAB
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-112 Electrical Engineering Lab 03 90 40 60

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Safety precautions and cleaning 6 CO1
2 Electrical Wiring 30 CO2
Transformers, Series and parallel circuits,
3 24 CO3
Verification of Ohms law, KCL and KVL
Measurement of electrical Quantities using
4 15 CO4
CRO
5 Batteries 15 CO5
Total 90

To apply safe working practices

Course Objectives To get acquainted with the usage of different types of tools, wires, cables
and electrical wiring
To test transformers, verify Ohm’s law, KCL and KVL
To operate CRO and measure electrical quantities and to make battery
connections

CO No Course Outcomes
CO1 EC-112.1 Use different electrical safety accessories and practices
CO2 EC-112.2 Use different types of electric tools, wires, cables, prepare wire joints and
practice electrical wiring.
CO3 EC-112.3 Test the working of given transformers, make series and parallel circuits and
verify Ohm’s law, KCL and KVL
CO4 EC-112.4 Operate CRO and measure electrical parameters using CRO
CO5 EC-112.5 Test the condition of battery and make series and parallel connection of
batteries
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-112.1 3 2 2 3 2
EC-112.2 3 2 3 2 3 2
EC-112.3 3 2 3 2 3 2
EC-112.4 3 1 1 3 2 3 2
EC-112.5 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
Average 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 2
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

101
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Safety precautions and cleaning
1.1 Identify safety symbols and interpret what they mean with the help of their colour and shape
1.2 Practice and follow preventive safety rules to avoid electrical accidents.
1.3 Select fire extinguishers according to the type of the fire and operate the fire extinguisher to
extinguish the fire.
1.4 Practice the disposal procedure of waste materials.
2.0 Electrical wiring
2.1 Identifying and working with the following tools used in Electrical Wiring
i. Wire stripper
ii. Insulation remover
iii. Pocket knife
iv. Electrical Tester
v. Phillips Head Screwdrivers
vi. Mallet
vii. Raw plug jumper
viii. Standard wire Gauge

2.2 Identifying and Working with Pliers

a. Identify and know the various functions of cutting pliers
i. Nose pliers
ii. Pipe pliers
iii. Flush cutter
iv. Top cutting pliers
v. Electronics pliers
vi. Insulated cutting pliers
b. perform the following operations
i. Holding
ii. Wire cutting
iii. Component bending
iv. Twisting the wire

2.3 Identification of different wires and cables

a. Identify Wires used for electrical wiring
i. Hook up wire
ii. Teflon wires
iii. Service wire
iv. TRS wires /PVC Wires (Al and Cu)
v. single strand
vi. Multi strand
vii. twisted Flexible pair wires
viii. Enamelled copper wire
ix. Power cord

102
 b. Identify Cables used for communication
i. UTP cable,
ii. Co axial cables
iii. Flat ribbon cable for antennas,
iv. Telephone cable
v. Ethernet cable
vi. Ribbon cables
vii. Optical fibre

2.4 Practice of wire joints

2.4.1 Make simple twist, married, Tee and western union joints
2.4.2 Make Britannia straight, Britannia ‘T’ (Tee) and rat tail joints

2.5 Identifying the Electrical accessories

i. SPST Switch
ii. SPDT switch
iii. Two pin and 3pin Sockets and plugs
iv. Power Socket
v. Power plugs
vi. Lamp holders
vii. Ceiling rose
viii. Mains Switch
ix. MCB
x. Kit-kat Fuse
xi. Fuse wire ratings
2.6 Know the mains supply Phase, Neutral and Ground
2.6.1 identify Phase and Neutral terminals in mains supply
2.6.2 Study the purpose of earthing
2.6.3 Make 2pin and 3pin Plug connections
2.7 Make simple switch connections using low voltage transformer
2.7.1 Make and test a circuit with one 6V lamp controlled by a switch (toggle)
2.7.2 Make and Test 2-way light switch connections
2.7.3 Make Series and parallel connection of lamps
3.0 Series and Parallel circuits & Measurement of Electrical Quantities using CRO
3.1 Verify Ohm’s law.
3.2 connect a series combination of three 1 kΩ resistors across 12V dc supply. Measure the current
in the circuit and calculate equivalent resistance of the series connected resistors.
3.3 connect a parallel combination of two 1 kΩ resistors across 10V dc supply. Measure the current
supplied by the source and calculate equivalent resistance of the parallel connected resistors.
3.4 Verify the Kirchhoff’s current law (with two branch currents)

103
3.5 Verify the Kirchhoff’s voltage Law (with one voltage source)
3.6 Identify the voltage rating, primary and secondary terminals of a given transformer and
measure its secondary voltage and turns ratio by applying rated primary voltage.

4.0 Measurement of electrical parameters using CRO

4.1 Study the function of front panel controls of CRO
4.2 Measure DC voltage using CRO
4.3 Measure amplitude and Time period of a sinusoidal signal using CRO.
5.0 Batteries
5.1 Study different types of batteries
5.2 Identify the given batteries/ cells and test whether they are in good condition or not
5.3 Connect the given two batteries in series and measure the voltage across the series connection.
What do you learn from the measured equivalent voltage and the voltage of each battery
5.4 Connect the given two batteries in parallel and measure the voltage across the parallel
connection. What do you learn from the measured equivalent voltage and the voltage of each
battery
5.5 Study various sections of Battery charger circuit

-0o0-

104
III SEMESTER

105
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
III SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical s/ Sem Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
EC- 301 Mathematics - 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
II
Electronic
EC -302 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Circuits -I
Digital
EC -303 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Electronics
Analog and
Digital
EC-304 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communicatio
n Systems
Network
EC-305 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Analysis
Programming
EC-306 in C and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
MATLAB
PRACTICAL
Electronic
Circuits-I &
EC-307 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Network
Analysis Lab
Digital
EC-308 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Electronics lab
Analog and
Digital
EC-309 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Communicatio
n systems Lab
Programming
in C and
EC-310 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
MATLAB
Practice Lab
Activities 3 45 - - - -

TOTAL 26 16 630 - 280 720 1000

Note: EC-301 is common with AEI/BM/CH/CHOT/CHPP/CHPC/CHST-301

106
 C-23
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
AEI/BM/CH/CHOT/CHPP/CHPC/CHST/EC-301

No. of Total No. of

Course Marks for FA Marks for SA
Course Title Periods/week periods
Code
Engineering
EC-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short
S.No. Unit Title Essay COs mapped
periods of Marks Answer
Questions
Questions
1 Indefinite Integration 20 32 4 2 CO1
Definite Integration 22 4 1
2 10 CO2
and its applications
3 Differential Equations 13 23 1 2 CO3
Laplace Transforms & 33 1 3
4 17 CO4
Fourier series
Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

(i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and definite

integrals with applications to engineering problems.
(ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn
various methods of solving first order differential equations.
Course Objectives
(iii) To learn the principles of solving homogeneous differential equations
of second order.
(iv) To comprehend and understand the concepts of Laplace
transformations and Fourier series.

CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

CO2 Evaluate definite integrals and learn its applications.
Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first
Course Outcomes CO3 order and first degree, and solve homogeneous differential equations
of second order.
Find Laplace Transforms of various functions and expand the given
CO4
functions as Fourier series.

107
 C-23
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
AEI/BM/CH/CHOT/CHPP/CHPC/CHST/EC-301

Learning Outcomes

Unit-I
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of  (u + v) dx and  k u dx
where u, v are functions of x and k is constant.
1.3. Solve problems involving standard functions using these properties
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i)  f (ax + b) dx , where f(x) is in standard form.
 ( f ( x)) f ( x) dx, n  −1
n
ii)

f ( x)
iii)  f ( x) dx
iv)  [ f ( g ( x))] g( x)dx
1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x w.r.t.x.
1.6. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type :
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a + x a − x x − a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a +x
2 2
a −x
2 2
x − a2
2

iii ) a 2 + x 2 , a 2 − x 2 , x 2 − a 2
1.7. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.8. Solve problems using integration by parts.
1.9 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form  u.vdx .

 e [ f ( x) + f ( x)] dx
x
1.10. Evaluate the integrals of the form

Unit-II
C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
L.O.2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3. Solve simple problems on definite integrals over an interval.
2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using these properties.
2.6. Find the area bounded by a curve and axes.
2.7. Obtain the mean and R.M.S values of the simple functions.
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

108
 Unit -III
C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree and
Solve homogeneous differential equation of second order.
L.O.3.1. Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.
dy
3.5 Solve linear differential equation of the form + Py = Q , where P and Q are functions of x
dx
only or constants.
3.6 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a(≠ 0), b, c are real numbers
and provide examples.

Unit-IV
Laplace transforms & Fourier series
C.O. 4 Find Laplace Transforms of various functions and expand the given functions as Fourier series.
L.O.4.1Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions for the existence of Laplace
Transform.
4.2.Obtain Laplace transforms of elementary functions and solve simple problems.
4.3 State linearity property, first shifting theorem of Laplace transforms (without proof) and solve
simple problems.
4.4 Define Inverse Laplace Transform.
4.5 Obtain Inverse Laplace Transforms for standard functions and solve simple problems.
4.6 State linearity property, first shifting theorem of Inverse Laplace transforms (without proof) and
solve simple problems.
4.7 Defineorthogonality of functions in an interval.
4.8 Define Fourier series of a function in the interval (c, c + 2 ) and Euler’s formulae for Fourier
coefficients.
4.9 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion of a function in an
interval.
4.10 Expand the functions f(x) = k (constant) and f(x) = x as Fourier series in the intervals (0 , 2π) and
(-π , π)
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 2.75 2.75 2.5 3 2.75 2.75

Note: The gaps in CO/PO mapping can be met with appropriate activities as follows:
For PO5: Appropriate quiz programmes may be conducted at intervals and duration as
decided by concerned faculty.

109
For PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
For PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the Library to refer standard
books on Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and
international journals. Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn
mathematical software tools.

PO- CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
column I
Mapped with CO Level
PO no Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)

Number %
CO1, CO2, 60
1 100% 3
CO3,CO4 (20+10+13+17) >40% Level 3
CO1, CO2, 29 Highly
2 48.3% 3
CO3,CO4 (6+5+6+12) addressed
CO1, CO2, 29 48.3%
3 3
CO3,C04 (6+5+6+12) 25% to 40%
CO1, CO2, 27 45% Level 2
4 3
CO3,CO4 (4+5+6+12) Moderately
5 addressed
6
7 5% to 25% Level
CO1, CO2, 1 Low addressed
PSO 1 60 100% 3
CO3,CO4
CO1, CO2, 29 48.3% <5% Not
PSO 2 3 addressed
CO3,CO4 (6+5+6+12)
CO1, CO2, 29 48.3%
PSO 3 3
CO3,CO4 (6+5+6+12)

COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration:
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of
indefinite integrals.Integration by substitution or change of variable.Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x,
cosec x.
Evaluation of integrals which are of the following forms:

110
 1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a + x a − x x − a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a +x
2 2
a −x
2 2
x − a2
2

iii ) a 2 + x 2 , a 2 − x 2 , x 2 − a 2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral, fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite
integrals,evaluation of simple definite integrals- Area bounded by a curve and axes, Mean and RMS
values of a function on a given interval.
Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation, order and degree of a differential equation, formation of
differential equations- Solutions of differential equations of first order and firstdegree using
dy
variables separable method and linear differential equation of the type + Py = Q - Solutions of
dx
homogenous linear differential equations of second order with constant coefficients.

Unit IV:
Laplace transforms & Fourier series
4. Definition, sufficient conditions for the existence of Laplace transform, Laplace transforms of
elementary functions, linearity property, state first shifting theorem with simple problems -
Definition of inverse Laplace transform, Inverse Laplace transforms of elementary functions,
linearity property, first shifting theorem.

5. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the

interval ( c , c + 2 ) , Euler’s formulae, sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series
expansion of a function, Fourier series expansion of basic functions limited to k (constant), x
over the intervals ( 0, 2 ) , ( − ,  ) .
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for second year third semester diploma courses, prepared &
prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. M. R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series.
4. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow .

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.7
Unit Test-II From L.O 3.1 to L.O 4.10

111
 EC-302, ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-302 Electronic Circuits-I 04 60 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 DC Power Supplies 12 21 2 1½ CO1
Transistor Biasing and
2 8 18 1 1½ CO2
stabilization
3 Small Signal Amplifiers 10 19 3 1 CO3
5 Large Signal Amplifiers 10 23 1 2 CO4
Feedback amplifiers
6 20 29 3 2 CO5
&Oscillators
Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

To understand different rectifier circuits and regulated power supplies

Course Objectives To familiarize with various transistor biasing and stabilization circuits
To understand different small signal, large signal amplifiers
To explain different feedback amplifiers and oscillators

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-302.1 Explain rectifier circuits and regulated power supplies
CO2 EC-302.2 Analyse the need of biasing and Stabilization techniques
CO3 EC-302.3 Explain the working of small signal amplifiers
CO4 EC-302.4 Describe various large signal amplifier circuits
Explain the working of small signal amplifiers, feedback amplifiers
CO5 EC-302.5
Describe various oscillator circuits

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-302.1 3 3 2 1 3 2
EC-302.2 3 3 2 1 2 3
EC-302.3 3 3 2 1 2 3
EC-302.4 3 3 2 1 2 3 1
EC-302.5 3 3 2 1 2 3
Average 3 3 2 1 2 3 1.5

3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

112
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 DC Power Supplies

1.1 Explain the necessity of D.C. power supply for electronic circuits
1.2 Explain the working of Half wave rectifier, Full Wave centre tapped rectifier and Bridge
rectifier circuits with wave forms
1.3 Write the equations for RMS value and averagevalue (DC value) voltages and currents for
these rectifiers (no need to derive the expressions)
1.4 i) Define ripple factor and efficiency for the these rectifier circuits
ii) Write the expressions for ripple factor and efficiency
1.5 Compare HW, FW Centre tapped and Bridge Rectifiers
1.6 List the different types of filters used in rectifier circuits
1.7 Explain the working of a RC, CRC and CLC filter for a full wave rectifier
1.8 Define Voltage Regulation
1.9 State the need for a DC regulated power supply
1.10 Draw the block diagram of DC regulated power supply and explain the function of
each block
1.11 Explain the working of a simple Zener regulator
1.12 List the types of IC regulators and give the advantages of IC regulators
1.13 Explain the operation of fixed positive and negative voltage Regulators (using 78xxand 79xx
series)
1.14 Explain the operation of adjustable voltage regulator (LM317).
2.0 Transistor biasing and stabilization
2.1 i) Explain the concept of DC and AC load lines
ii) Define operating point of transistor amplifier
iii) List the factors affecting the operating point
iv) Analyse the selection of proper operating point
2.2 Explain the importance of transistor biasing
2.3 Explain the need for stabilization
2.4 Define stability factors and give their equations
2.5 List the types of biasing circuits
2.6 Explain the fixed bias circuit and list its drawbacks.
2.7 i) Explain self-bias circuit
ii) State the importance of emitter by-pass capacitor, Ceinself bias circuit
iii) Analyse the stability of self bias circuit
iv) List the advantages of self bias circuit
2.8 Explain the concept of thermal runaway
2.9 State the importance of heat sink

3.0 Small Signal Amplifiers

3.1 Define h-parameters of BJT

3.2 Draw the h-model of CB, CE and CC transistor configurations
3.3 Draw the practical single stage transistor CE amplifier and explain the function of each
component.

113
 3.4 Classify the amplifiers based on frequency of operation, period of conduction and type of
coupling.
3.5 State the need for Multistage amplifier (Cascading of amplifiers)
3.6 Define the terms gain, gain in db., frequency response and bandwidth of an amplifier
3.7 Explain the working of two-stage RC coupled amplifier with circuit diagram
3.8 Draw and explain the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier
3.9 Explain the working of two-stage transformer coupled amplifier with circuit diagram
3.10 Draw and explain the frequency response of transformer-coupled amplifier
3.11 Explain the working of direct coupled amplifier with circuit diagram
3.12 Explain the operation of Darlington pair with the help of circuit diagram
3.13 List three applications of Darlington pair.

4.0 Large signal Amplifiers

4.1 State the need for power amplifier

4.2 Compare voltage and power amplifier
4.3 Classify power amplifiers based on period of conduction
4.4 Explain the working of Class A, Class B, Class AB and Class C amplifiers with waveforms
4.5 Explain the working of Class-B Push-pull amplifier with circuit diagram
4.6 Explain the working of complementary symmetry Push-pull power amplifier with circuit
diagram
4.7 List different distortions in power amplifiers
4.8 Explain the working of Class-AB Push-pull amplifier circuit
4.9 Mention the applications of Class C Amplifiers
4.10 Compare efficiency of different types of power amplifiers
4.11 Draw the circuit diagrams of single and double tuned amplifiers and give their frequency
response curves.

5.0 Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators

5.1 State the concept of feedback
5.2 Compare positive and negative feedback.
5.3 Explain negative feedback amplifier with block diagram
5.4 Derive the expression for the gain of negative feedback amplifier
5.5 List the four types of negative feedback amplifiers
5.6 Explain the effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances
of an amplifier
5.7 List the merits of negative feedback amplifiers
5.8 Draw the block diagrams of voltage series, current series, current shunt and voltage Shunt
feedback amplifiers and Compare their characteristics
5.9 State the conditions (Barkhausen criteria) for an amplifier to work as an oscillator
5.10 Classify oscillator circuits
5.11 Explain the working of an RC phase shift oscillator with a circuit diagram
5.12 Explain the working of aWein Bridge oscillator with a circuit diagram

114
 5.13 Explain the working of Hartley oscillator with a circuit diagram
5.14 Explain the working of Colpitts oscillator with a circuit diagram
5.15 Write the expressions for frequency of oscillations and conditions for sustained oscillations
of the above circuits
5.16 Draw the equivalent circuit of piezoelectric crystal
5.17 Explain the working of transistor crystal oscillator with a circuit diagram
5.18 List the advantages of crystal oscillators over other types of oscillators.
5.19 List the applications of RC, LC and Crystal oscillators.

COURSE CONTENT:

1.0 DC Power Supplies: Necessity of DC power supply- Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifiers
Working, Wave forms, RMS value, Average value of voltages and currents - Ripple factor and
efficiency – Comparison of HW, FW Centre tapped, and bridge rectifiers – Need for filters –
Working of RC, CRC, CLC –Swinging choke – Need for regulated power supply – Voltage
regulation – Zener regulator –IC regulator

2.0 Transistorbiasing and Stabilization

DC and AC load lines, transistor biasing, operating point, types of biasing circuits, Fixed bias
network, thermal runaway, bias stabilization, self-bias network, heat sink

3.0 Small signal Amplifiers

h-parameters of a transistor amplifier-Practical transistor CE amplifier -Classification of
amplifiers based on frequency, period of conduction and coupling- Multistage amplifier - gain,
frequency response and bandwidth of an amplifier- RC coupled amplifier - frequency response
of RC coupled amplifier- transformer coupled amplifier - Frequency response of transformer
coupled amplifier- direct coupled amplifier - Darlington pair - applications of Darlington pair

4.0 Large signal Amplifiers

Need for Power Amplifier- comparison of voltage and power amplifier -Classification of power
amplifiers based on conduction (Class A, B, AB, C)- operation of Class A, Class B, Class AB & Class
C with waveforms- Working of Class B Push-pull amplifier circuit- Distortions in power
amplifiers- Applications of Class C Amplifiers as - Efficiencies of different power amplifiers-Single
tuned and Double tuned amplifier.

5.0 Feedback Amplifiers& Oscillators

Concept of feedback – positive and negative feedback-Block diagram of negative feedback
amplifier - four types of negative feedback amplifiers- Block diagrams of voltage series, current
series, current shunt and voltage Shunt feedback amplifiers- Expression for the gain of negative
feedback amplifiers- Effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, input and output
impedances- comparison of characteristics of feedback amplifiers.

Oscillators

Condition for an amplifier to work as an oscillator (Barkhausen criteria) - RC phase shift

oscillator – Wein bridge oscillator- Hartley oscillator- Colpitts oscillator - Equivalent circuit of
crystal - crystal oscillator - Advantages of crystal oscillator- Applications of RC, LC and crystal
oscillators.

115
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. G.K.Mithal, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 23rd Edition, 2014, Khanna Publishers
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 4th edition PHI, India Publishers
3. T.F. Bogart Jr, J.S. Beasley and G. Rico, Electronic Devices and Circuits, 6th edition, 2004
Pearson Education
4. Albert Malvino and J Bates, Electronic Principles, 7th edition Tata McGraw-Hill Education
(TMH) Publishers.
5. V.K. Mehta, Principles of Electronics, 2008, S Chand & Company
6. S. Saliva Hanan, N. SureshKumar, Electronic devices &circuits, 4thedition, McGraw-Hill
Education
7. Allen Mottershead, Electronic devices &circuits, An introduction, PHI Publication

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.13
Unit Test-II From 4.1 to 5.20

116
 EC-303, DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-303 Digital Electronics 4 60 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Basics of Digital
1 15 26 2 2 CO1
Electronics.
2 Logic Families 7 16 2 1 CO2
Combinational Logic
3 15 26 2 2 CO3
circuits.
4 Sequential Logic Circuits. 15 26 2 2 CO4
Semiconductor
5 8 16 2 1 CO5
memories.
Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

1. To familiarize with various number systems, postulates of Boolean algebra,

logic gates and logic circuits
Course Objectives 2. To analyse the working of logic gates, combinational and sequential circuits
and memories
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of digital electronic circuits

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Convert a number from one system to another system, implement logic
CO1 EC-303.1
circuits and analyse logic expressions.
CO2 EC-303.2 Describe different logic families
CO3 EC-303.3 Design combinational logic circuits
CO4 EC-303.4 Construct different sequential logic circuits
CO5 EC-303.5 Describe different semiconductor memories

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-303.1 3 3 1 1 1 3 1
EC-303.2 3 3 1 1 3
EC-303.3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1
EC-303.4 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1
EC-303.5 3 3 1 1 3 1 1
Average 3 3 2.3 1 1 1 3 1 1
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

117
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Basics of Digital Electronics

1.1 i) Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems.
ii) Convert a given decimal number into Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal number and
vice versa
iii) Convert a given binary number into octal and hexadecimal number and vice versa
1.2 Perform binary addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
1.3 i) Write 1’s complement and 2’s complement numbers for a given binary number.
ii) Perform subtraction of binary numbers in 2’s complement method.
1.4 Compare weighted and Un-weighted codes.
1.5 Write Binary equivalent number for a number in 8421, Excess-3 and Gray Code and vice-
versa.
1.6 Mention the use of alphanumeric codes (ASCII & EBCDIC)
1.7 State different postulates in Boolean algebra
1.8 Explain the basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT gates with their truth tables
1.9 Explain the working of universal logic gates (NAND, NOR gates) with truth tables
1.10 Explain the working of an Exclusive–OR gate with truth table
1.11 i) State De-Morgan’s theorems
ii) Apply De-Morgan’s theorems and other postulates to simplify Boolean expressions
(up to three variables only)
1.12 Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates
1.13 Explain standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)
1.14 Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table
1.15 Write Boolean expressions for real life examples
1.16 Simplify Boolean Expression using Karnaugh map (up to 3 variables only)

2.0 Logic families

2.1 Classify logic families
2.2 List the important characteristics of Digital ICs of different logic families.
2.3 Define the terms: propagation delay, Noise margin, Fan-in, Fan-out and Power
dissipation of digital ICs.
2.4 State the voltage and current logic levels of TTL and CMOS ICs.
2.5 Explain the working of Totem-pole output TTL NAND gate with circuit diagram.
2.6 Explain the working of open collector TTL NAND gate with circuit diagram.
2.7 Explain the working principle of CMOS Technology with diagram
2.8 Explain the working of CMOS NAND and CMOS NOR Gates with circuit diagram.
2.9 Compare the TTL, CMOS and ECL logic families.
2.10 List IC numbers of two input TTL Logic gates.

3.0 Combinational logic circuits

3.1 State the concept of combinational logic circuit.

3.2 i) Explain Half adder circuit using Ex-OR, AND gates
ii) Realize Half-adder using i) NAND gates only and ii) NOR gates only.
3.3 i) Explain the operation of Full adder circuit with truth table using Ex-OR gate and basic
gates.
ii)Realize full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR gate
3.4 Explain the working of 4 Bit parallel adder using full adders.

118
 3.5 Explain the logic circuit of 4-bit 2’s compliment adder/subtractor.
3.6 Explain the working of 4-bit serial adder with block diagram.
3.7 Compare the performance of serial and parallel adders
3.8 Explain 4x1 Multiplexer with logic circuit
3.9 Mention any 3 applications of multiplexers
3.10 Explain 1x4 De-multiplexer with logic circuit
3.11 Mention any 3 applications of De-multiplexers.
3.12 Explain the working of 8x3 encoder
3.13 Explain the working of 3x8 decoder
3.14 Mention any 3 applications of decoders.
3.15 Explain the working of BCD to decimal decoder
3.16 State the need for a tri-state buffer.
3.17 Draw the logic symbols of unidirectional/ bi-directional tri-state buffers.
3.18 Draw and explain a simple tri-state buffer circuit.
3.19 Realize two-bit digital comparator circuit using gates

4.0 Sequential logic circuits

4.1 State the concept of Sequential logic circuits.

4.2 Distinguish between combinational and sequential logic circuits
4.3 Explain NAND and NOR latches with truth tables.
4.4 i)State the necessity of clock in digital circuits
ii) Differentiate between level triggering and edge triggering
4.5 Explain clocked SR flip flop using NAND gates.
4.6 State the need for preset and clear inputs.
4.7 i) Explain level clocked JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) with truth table.
ii) State race around condition in JK flipflops
4.8 Explain the logic circuits of D-Flipflop and T-Flipflops with truth tables
4.9 Explain the master slave JK flip flop with necessary diagrams.
4.10 i) Give the concept of edge triggering.
ii) Draw the symbols of edge triggered D and T flip flops.
4.11 List the applications of flip flops.
4.12 Define the term modulus of a counter.
4.13 i) Explain the working of 4-bit asynchronous counter with circuit diagram and timing
diagram.
ii) Explain the working of asynchronous decade counter with circuit diagram and Timing
diagram.
iii) Explain the working of asynchronous 3 bit up-down counter with circuit diagram.
4.14 Explain the working of 4-bit synchronous counter with circuit diagram.
4.15 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
4.16 i) State the necessity of Registers and classify registers based on data i/o operations
ii) Explain the working of 4-bit shift left register with Circuit diagram
iii) Explain the working of 4-bit shift right register with Circuit diagram.
iv) List any four common applications of shift registers.

5.0 Semiconductor memories

5.1 Classify different types of semiconductor memories
5.2 Define the terms: i) memory read operation; ii) memory write operation; iii) access time;
iv) memory capacity; v) address lines; vi) word length related to memories

119
 5.3 Differentiate:
i) Read Only Memory & Read write memory;
ii) Sequential access memory & Random Access Memory
5.4 Explain working of diode ROM with suitable circuit diagram
5.5 Distinguish between EEPROM and UVEPROM
5.6 Explain the working of basic dynamic MOS RAM cell with suitable circuit diagram
5.7 Compare static RAM and dynamic RAM
5.8 State the difference between Flash ROM and NV RAM
5.9 State the use of pen drive, SD Card, solid state hard disk.

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Basics of Digital Electronics

Number systems- Conversion from one number system to another number system-Binary
Arithmetic-Weighted and un-weighted codes - parity Bit- Boolean algebra – Basic gates-
Universal gates - De-Morgan’s Theorems-Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR
gates-SOP and POS forms-Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table-Karnaugh map
(up to 3 variables only)

2.0 Logic families.

Classify different logic families- characteristics of logic families-open collector TTL NAND gate
with circuit diagram-Totem pole output TTL NAND gate –CMOS working Principle- Logic gates
using CMOS Technology -Compare TTL, CMOS and ECL

3.0 Combinational logic circuits

Concept of combinational logic circuits- Half adder circuit - Full adder circuit - a 4 Bit parallel
adder using full adders- 2’s compliment parallel adder/ Subtractor circuit- Serial adder -
Performance of serial and parallel adder- Operation of 4x1 Multiplexers- Operation of 1 to 4
de-multiplexer- applications- 8x3 Encoder - 3x8 decoder- Applications - Tri-state buffer-
working of simple tri state buffer -Types of tri-state buffers- one-bit digital comparator.

4.0 Sequential logic circuits

Concept of Sequential logic circuits- NAND and NOR latches - Necessity of clock - Concept of
level and edge triggering - Clocked SR flip flop circuit using NAND gates- Need for preset and
clear inputs - Circuit of level Clocked JK flip flop (using S-R flip-flops) -Race around condition-
Master slave JK flip flop circuit - edge triggered clocked D and T flip flops - Truth table, Circuit
diagram - Symbols of above Flip Flops- - Applications of flip flops-Modulus of a counter- 4-bit
asynchronous counter - Asynchronous decade counter with a circuit - 4-bit synchronous
counter –differences between synchronous and asynchronous counters- asynchronous 3 bit
up-down counter – Need for a Register - Types of registers- 4 bit shift left and shift right
registers - Applications of shift registers.

5.0 Semiconductor memories

Types of memories -Memory read operation, write operation, access time, memory capacity,
address lines and word length- ROM and RAM- Diode ROM- EEPROM and UVEPROM- Dynamic
MOS RAM cell- static RAM and dynamic RAM- Differences between Flash ROM and NV RAM –
use of pen drive, SD card, solid state disk

120
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. 1. Malvino and Leach, Digital Computer Electronics, 3rdedition Tata McGraw-Hill Edition
2. RP JAIN, Modern Digital Electronics, 3theditionTMH
3. Roger L. Tokheim , Digital Electronics: Principles & Application, McGraw-Hill Edition,2008
4. GK Kharate, Digital Electronics, Oxford UniversityPress.
5. V.K. Puri, Digital Electronics, TataMcGraw-Hill.
6. M.MorrisMano,Digital logic &Computer Design,PEARSONEdition 2017
7. M.MorrisMano,MichaelD.Ciletti,DigitalDesign,PEARSON 4th Edition
.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit Test-II From 3.8 to 5.9

121
 EC-304, ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Analog and Digital
EC-304 5 75 20 80
Communication systems

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 Amplitude Modulation 15 21 2 1.5 CO1
Angle Modulation
2 15 16 2 1 CO2
techniques
Transmitters and
3 17 26 2 2 CO3
Receivers
Digital communication
4 13 21 2 1.5 CO4
principles
Digital modulation
5 15 26 2 2 CO5
techniques
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To familiarize the concepts of analog communication systems and digital

communication systems
Course
2. To equip with various issues related to analog and digital communications such as
Objectives
modulation, demodulation, transmitters, receivers and noise performance

3. To learn the practical importance and applications of communication systems

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-304.1 Understand the amplitude modulation techniques.

CO2 EC-304.2 Familiarize with angle modulation methods.

CO3 EC-304.3 Describe the principles and working of transmitters and receivers.

CO4 EC-304.4 Interpret the Digital Communication and multiplexing techniques.

CO5 EC-304.5 Describe different digital modulation techniques and Modems.

122
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-304.1 3 2 2 2 3 2
EC-304.2 3 2 2 2 3 2
EC-304.3 3 1 1 2 2 3 1 2
EC-304.4 3 1 1 2 3 3 2 2
EC-304.5 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2
Average 3 1.8 1 0 2 0 2.4 3 1 2

3=strongly mapped
2=moderately mapped
1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Amplitude modulation techniques

1.1 Explain the basic elements of a communication system with a block diagram
1.2 Explain the frequency spectrum of radio waves and state the applications of each band
1.3 Explain about time domain and frequency domain waveforms.
1.4 Define modulation and state the need for modulation in communication systems.
1.5 Define baseband signal, carrier signal and modulated signal.
1.6 Classify various types of continuous wave modulation systems
1.7 Define amplitude modulation and draw its waveform
1.8 Define the modulation index of an AM signal.
1.9 Derive the time-domain equation for an AM signal.
1.10 Explain the frequency spectrum of an AM wave and hence calculate its Bandwidth
1.11 State the effects of over modulation
1.12 Derive the relation between total power and carrier power in AM and Solve simple problems
1.13 State the need for DSB-SC and SSB modulation and list their advantages and disadvantages of
SSB.
2.0 Angle Modulation
2.1 Define angle modulation
2.2 List the types of angle modulation
2.3 Define Frequency modulation and and draw its waveform.
2.4 Define the modulation index of an FM signal
2.5 Define Phase Modulation
2.6 Derive the time domain equation for FM signal and explain its bandwidth requirements.
2.7 Explain the frequency spectrum of FM wave
2.8 Distinguish between narrow band and wide band FM
2.9 Higher frequency components of FM signal are affected most by noise: Justify with Noise
triangle.
2.10 Define the terms pre-emphasis and de-emphasis
2.11 Distinguish between FM and PM
2.12 List the merits of FM over AM
2.13 Classify different types of noise
2.14 Define the terms: i) Signal to Noise Ratio; ii) Noise Figure; and iii) Noise Temperature

123
3.0 Transmitters and Receivers
3.1 List the specifications of transmitters.
3.2 Distinguish between low level and high-level modulation
3.3 Draw the block diagram for high level modulated transmitter and explain its working
3.4 Draw the low-level modulated Transmitter and explain its working
3.5 Draw the block diagram of FM transmitter using reactance method and explain its working
3.6 Draw and explain the block diagram of indirect method of FM generation (Armstrong method)
3.7 Classify radio receivers
3.8 Define sensitivity, selectivity and fidelity of a radio receiver
3.9 i) Draw the block diagram of TRF receiver and explain the function of each block.
ii) State the limitations of TRF Receiver
3.10 Explain the working of super heterodyne AM receiver with a block diagram.
3.11 Define the terms Image frequency and IMRR in a radio receiver.
3.12 State the factors to be considered for choice of IF.
3.13 State the need for AVC (AGC).
3.14 Explain the process of demodulation with Envelope detector in AM receivers
3.15 Draw and explain the circuit diagram of practical AM detector
3.16 Explain the working of super heterodyne FM receiver with a block diagram.
3.17 Explain the process of demodulation with Foster-Seeley discriminator (Phase discriminator) in
FM receivers

4.0 Digital Communication Principles

4.1 Distinguish between analog and digital signals
4.2 List the advantages and disadvantages of digital communication system over analog
communication system
4.3 Define information capacity of a channel.
4.4 State sampling theorem and mention its significance in pulse modulation techniques
4.5 Classify pulse modulation techniques.
4.6 Define PAM and its waveform
4.7 Define PWM and its waveform
4.8 Define PPM and its waveform
4.9 Compare PAM, PWM and PPM
4.10 Define the term quantization
4.11 Explain the process of quantization with waveforms.
4.12 State quantization noise.
4.13 Describe the coding and decoding of a PCM signal.
4.14 Define Multiplexing in digital communications
4.15 State the need for multiplexing
4.16 Explain the concept of Frequency Division Multiplexing with block diagram
4.17 Explain the concept of Time Division Multiplexing with block diagram
4.18 Compare TDM and FDM

5.0 Digital Modulation Techniques

5.1 State data encoding

124
5.2 List different analog signal to digital signal encoding schemes
5.3 Explain the process of Asynchronous data communication scheme
5.4 Define Overhead and Efficiency of data communication system
5.5 Explain the process of synchronous data communication
i) List different error detection schemes
ii) Explain parity check method of error detection.
iii) Explain Checksum method of error detection.
iv) Explain CRC method of error detection with an example.
v) Explain method of error correction using FEC method (Hamming Code).
5.6 State the need for digital modulation
5.7 State the difference between bit rate and baud rate
5.8 Define ASK, FSK and PSK
5.9 Explain Binary ASK modulator with block diagram.
5.10 Explain Binary ASK coherent demodulator with block diagram
5.11 Explain BFSK modulator with block diagram.
5.12 Explain Coherent BFSK demodulator.
5.13 Explain BPSK modulator with block diagram
5.14 Explain BPSK demodulator with block diagram
5.15 Compare ASK, FSK and PSK
5.16 State the need for QAM
5.17 Explain 4QAM Modulator with block diagram
5.18 State the need for a MODEM in data communications
5.19 List different types of MODEMs
5.20 State the concept of Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) technology
5.21 List the features of Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) technology

COURSE CONTENT:

1.0 Amplitude modulation techniques

Elements of a communication system - block diagram- frequency spectrum – time domain
signal-frequency domain signa l- need for modulation in communication systems- baseband,
carrier, and modulated signals -amplitude modulation- wave form of an AM wave- time-domain
equation for an AM signal- modulation index of an AM signal- frequency spectrum of an AM
signal-bandwidth of an AM signal - effects of over modulation - relation between total power
and carrier power in AM-Solve simple problems- need for DSBSC and SSB modulation-
advantages and disadvantages of SSB

2.0 Angle Modulation

Angle modulation- types of angle modulation-Definition of Frequency modulation - Phase
modulation - time domain equation for FM signal-bandwidth of FM signal modulation index of
an FM signal- frequency spectrum of FM - narrow band and wide band FM- noise triangle in
FM- pre-emphasis and de-emphasis - differences between FM and PM - Merits of FM over AM-
types of noise- signal to noise ratio, noise figure and noise temperature.

3.0 Transmitters and Receivers.

125
 Specifications of transmitters- Distinguish between low level and high level modulation -block
diagram for high level modulated transmitter - block diagram for low level modulated
Transmitter - block diagram of FM transmitter(reactance tube) - block diagram of indirect FM
transmitter (Armstrong method)-classify radio receivers- sensitivity, selectivity and fidelity- block
diagram of TRF receiver - limitations of TRF Receiver-super heterodyne receiver – Define the
terms image frequency, IMRR- choice of IF- AVC –Envelop detector –FM receiver- Foster-Seeley
discriminator.

4.0 Digital Communication Principles

Distinguish analog, digital signals -Analog, digital communication systems- Information capacity
of channel-Sampling theorem - pulse modulation techniques – PAM – PWM – PPM -
Quantization-Coding and decoding of PCM- Multiplexing techniques- need for Multiplexing –
FDM- TDM- comparison of FDM and TDM

5.0 Digital Modulation Techniques

Data encoding- Analog, digital encoding schemes- Asynchronous data communication –
Overhead, efficiency- synchronous data communication – Error detection – Parity check – Check
sum- CRC – Error correction – Digital modulation – bit rate, baud rate - Define ASK, FSK –Binary
ASK- BFSK- BPSK- QAM, Compare ASK, FSK, PSK, QAM-- modem – need of modem – types of
modems -DSL- ADSL

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar Electronic communications systems
2. George Kennedy- Bernard Davis Electronic Communication System Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited
3. S.Salivahanam, A.Vallavaraj&C.Gnanapriya, Signal Systems and Communication
4. Herbert Taub& Donald L Schilling, Principles Of Electronic Communication Systems, 3rd
Edition-2009.McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited
5. G.K.Mithal, Radio communication - khanna publishers
6. Wayne Thomassi, Electronic communication systems 4th edition Pearson publication
7. T.L.Singhal, Analog& Digital communication, McGraw Hill Education

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.10
Unit Test-II From 3.11 to 5.21

126
 EC-305, NETWORK ANALYSIS

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC- 305 Network Analysis 5 75 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Mesh current and Node
1 18 26 2 2 CO1
voltage analysis
2 Network Theorems 20 26 2 2 CO2

3 Resonance 12 16 2 1 CO3
Transient analysis,
4 Laplace transforms and 18 26 2 2 CO4
its applications
5 Filters and Attenuators 7 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To learn network analysis techniques, theorems, transients, filters

and attenuators.
Course Objectives
2. To analyse networks using mesh, node analysis, transient analyses,
filters, attenuators etc.
3. To learn the practical importance Network analysis.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-305.1 Apply mesh and node analysis in solving circuits.
CO2 EC-305.2 Verify different network theorems.
CO3 EC-305.3 Construct resonance circuits and determine different parameters.
CO4 EC-305.4 Describe transient analysis, Laplace transforms and applications.
CO5 EC-305.5 Explain different filters and attenuators.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-305.1 3 3 1 2 3 1 1
EC-305.2 3 3 1 2 3 1 1
EC-305.3 3 3 1 2 3 1 1
EC-305.4 3 3 1 2 3 1 1
EC-305.5 3 3 3 2 3 1 1
Average 3 3 1.4 2 3 1 1
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

127
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Mesh current and Node voltage analysis

1.1 Define the terms: branch, node, junction and loop in circuits
1.2 Determine the number of mesh equations required to solve the given Network
1.3 Write the mesh current equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix form
1.4 Solve the mesh current equations using Cramer’s rule.
1.5 Determine the number of node voltage equations for a given network
1.6 Write the node voltage equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix form.
1.7 Solve the node voltage equations using Cramer’s rule
1.8 Explain duality of a network
1.9 Draw the dual of given network.

2.0 Network theorems

2.1 State Thevenin’s, and Norton’s theorems and mention their use
2.2 Solve simple network problems usingThevenin’s and Norton’s theorems
2.3 State superposition theorem
2.4 Solve simple problems using superposition theorem
2.5 State Maximum power transfer theorem for DC & AC circuits.
2.6 Solve simple problems on maximum power transfer theorem
2.7 State the importance of impedance matching.
2.8 State Reciprocity theorem
2.9 State the importance of Reciprocity theorem.
2.10 List the advantages and limitations of above theorems
2.11 Explain Star and Delta configurations of resistances
2.12 Give transformation formulas from Star to Delta & Delta to Star (no derivation)
2.13 Solve simple problems on Star/Delta and Delta/Star transformation
3.0 Resonance

3.1 Explain the concept of resonance in RLC series circuit

3.2 i) State the conditions for series resonance
ii) Derive the formula for frequency of resonance in series RLC circuit
iii) Draw the characteristic curves for series resonance
iv) Define bandwidth of a resonant circuit
v) Define lower cut-off and upper cut-off frequencies
vi) Give formula for lower cut-off and upper cut-off frequencies
vii) Solve simple problems on series Resonance.
3.3 Explain Parallel AC circuit containing RLC
3.4 Solve simple problems onParallel AC circuits containing RLC using the following three methods
a) Vector or phasor method
b) Admittance method
c) Vector algebra method for solving AC parallel circuits.
3.5 Explain Resonance in parallel circuits
3.6 State the conditions required for parallel resonance
3.7 Derive Equation for resonant frequency in parallel resonant circuit
3.8 Give graphical representation of parallel resonance.
3.9 Compare Series and parallel resonance

128
 3.10 Solve problems on Resonance
3.11 Explain the effect of resistance on Bandwidth.
4.0 Transient analysis, Laplace transform and its applications in circuit analysis

4.1 Define the terms: i) Initial conditions; ii) Steady state; and iii) Transient state
4.2 i) Explain the DC response of RL circuit.
ii) Derive expression for current in RL circuit.
4.3 i) Explain the DC response of RC circuit.
ii) Derive expression for current in RC circuit.
4.4 Explain the dc response of an RLC circuit.
4.5 Solve simple problems on series RL, RC circuits for DC excitation.
4.6 Define Laplace Transform and explain the concept of complex frequency
4.7 State the use of Laplace transform to convert from time domain to frequency domain (S-
domain)
4.8 Define i) Delta function ii) Unit step function iii) Ramp function iv) Exponential function
4.9 Write Laplace transforms of following functions: i) Delta function ii) Unit step function iii)
Ramp function iv) Exponential function v) Sine and Cosine functions vi) Hyperbolic sine and
cosine functions vii) Damped sine function viii) Damped hyperbolic cosine and sine functions
4.10 State inverse Laplace transform
4.11 Write inverse Laplace transforms corresponding to Laplace transform of the following
functions: i) Unit step function ii) Exponential function iii) Sine and cosine functions iv)
Hyperbolic sine and cosine functions v) Damped sine function vi) Damped hyperbolic cosine
and sine functions
4.12 Represent the element models of resistance, inductance and capacitances in time and S-
domains
4.13 Apply Laplace transform to solve simple problems on RL, RC, RLC circuits.

5.0 Filters and attenuators

5.1 Define the terms: Neper, Decibel, Characteristic impedance, Propagation constant and
Attenuation
5.2 Define the terms: Filter, LPF, HPF, BPF and BSF
5.3 Draw the characteristic curves for the above filters
5.4 Derive the expressions for fc for constant K-LPF, HPF
5.5 List the disadvantages of constant K filters.
5.6 State the function of attenuator circuit and list different types of attenuators.
5.7 Explain T & π type attenuators with circuit diagram

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Mesh current and Node voltage analysis

Define: branch, node, junction, loop - Mesh current equations – Solve problems - Node voltage
equations -simple problems – duality

2.0. Network theorems

129
 The venin’s, and Norton’s theorems – solve problems - superposition theorem- Maximum power
transfer theorems- solve problems – impedance matching - Reciprocity theorem - advantages
and limitations of above theorems - star and Delta transformation - delta to star transformation-
simple problems
3.0. Resonance
Concept of resonance in RLC series circuit -Conditions for series resonance- frequency of
resonance in series RLC circuit- Characteristic curves for series resonance- bandwidth of a
resonant circuit- Lower cut off and upper cut off frequencies- Formula for lower cut off and
upper cut off frequencies- Simple problems on series Resonance- Parallel AC circuit containing
RLC- methods a) Vector or Pharos method b) Admittance method c) Vector algebra method for
solving AC parallel circuits-Simple problems using above 3 methods- Resonance in parallel
circuits- Conditions required for parallel resonance- Equation for resonant frequency- Graphical
representation of parallel resonance- Series and parallel resonance comparison-Problems on
resonance- Effect of Resistance on Bandwidth
4.0 Transient analysis, Laplace transform and its applications in circuit analysis
Definition of initial condition, steadystate, transient state-DC response for RL, RC, RLC circuits-
Solve the simple problems on series RL, RC circuits of DC excitation-delta function, unit step
function, ramp function, exponential function- LaPlace transforms for the above functions-
element models of R, L, C in time and frequency domains-simple network problems using
Laplace transforms.
5.0 Filters and attenuators
Define neper, decibel, characteristic impedance, propagation constant, Attenuation-Define filter,
LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF- characteristic curves of filters - constant K-LPF, HPF-disadvantages –Function
of attenuator - T& π attenuators

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hayt&Kemerly, Engineering Circuit analysis, 8th edition, McGraw Hill Publishers
2. Van Valkenberg, Network analysis, PHI
3. Sudhakar&Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Networks,TMH
4. Joseph Adminster, Network Theory- Schaum Series, McGraw Hill Publishers
5. D Roy Choudhury, Networks and Systems, Wiely Eastern Limited
6. Dr.Shyalashree.N,Dr. MamathaA.S,Dr.Abhaydeshpande,Dr.V.Sridhar,Nerwork theory: a
rd
simplified approach, 3 Edition, MEDTECH
7. A.Chakrabarti, CircuitTheory (Analysis & syntheses), Dhampatrai& co

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.13
Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.7

130
 EC-306, PROGRAMMING IN C& MATLAB

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA

EC-306 Programming in C & MATLAB 04 60 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 C Programming Basics 10 16 2 1 CO1
Conditional statements
2 12 26 2 2 CO2
and arrays
Strings, Functions &
3 13 26 2 2 CO3
Pointers
4 Structures &unions 12 16 2 1 CO4

5 Basics of MATLAB 13 26 2 2 CO5

Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

1. To familiarize with programming in C language and MATLAB

2. To understand the programming in C language and MATLAB
Course Objectives
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of programming in C
language and MATLAB

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-306.1 Describe the basics of C Programming.
CO2 EC-306.2 Explain conditional statements and Arrays of C Programming
CO3 EC-306.3 Analyse the use of strings, functions and pointers C programming.
CO4 EC-306.4 Describe the structures and unions in C-Programming.
CO5 EC-306.5 Describe the basics of MATLAB

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-306.1 3 1 1 3 1 1
EC-306.2 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
EC-306.3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
EC-306.4 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
EC-306.5 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
Average 3 1.8 2 2 1 2 3 1.8 1.8

3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

131
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 C Programming Basics

1.1 Give the structure of C program
1.2 Mention the character set of C language.
1.3 Define the Keywords and list them
1.4 List the data types used in C
1.5 i)Define constants and variables
ii)Explain the declaration& initialization of variables.
1.6 List the five Arithmetic Operators supported by C
1.7 Define an expression and show how to evaluate an Arithmetic Expression
1.8 i) Define the assignment statement and give the syntax of assignment statement
ii) Write the syntax for nested assignment statement
iii) List the compound/shorthand assignment operators
1.9 Explain the increment and decrement operators.
1.10 Explain printf () and scanf () functions with examples.
1.11 Mention various type conversion techniques and discuss them
1.12 List the four relational operates used in C
1.13 Give the operator precedence.
1.14 List the three logical operators supported by C
1.15 List the three bitwise logical operators

2.0 Conditional Statements and Arrays

2.1 Describe the conditional expression
2.2 List the four conditional statements supported by C
2.3 Write the syntaxes of the following conditional statements and explain
i. If
ii. If.. else.
iii. Nested if …else
2.4 Write the syntax of switch case statement and explain.
2.5 Write simple programs based on conditional statements.
i) Write a program to find whether a given year is leap year or not
ii) Write a program to find biggest of three numbers
iii) Write a program to check whether a given number is even or odd by using bitwise logical
operator
iv) Write a program to check whether a given character is vowel or consonant by using
switch case statement
v) Write a program to perform arithmetic operations using switch case statement
2.6 List the three types of iterative statements supported by C
2.7 Write the syntaxes of the following iterative statements and explain
i. while
ii. for
iii. do… while
2.8 Differentiate while & do while loops

132
2.9 Differentiate break & continue statements
2.10 Write the syntax of nested loops and explain
2.11 Write programs based on iterative statements.
i) Write a program to find sum of n natural numbers
ii) Write a program to find sum of digits of a given number
iii) Write a program to check whether a given number is Armstrong or not
iv) Write a program to print fibonacci series using loops.
v) Write a program to print even and odd numbers
vi) Write a program to check whether a given number is prime number or not
vii) Write a program to print prime numbers between two given numbers
viii) Write a program to check whether a given number is PALINDROME or not

2.12 i) Define an Array.

ii) Explain declaration and initialization of One-Dimensional Array.
iii) Explain accessing the elements in the Array.
2.13 i) Write a C program to find largest / smallest number in an array
ii) Write a C program to sort the numbers in an array in ascending order
iii) Write a C program to find sum of elements of an array
2.14 Explain declaration and initialization of two-Dimensional Arrays.
2.15 Write a C program to perform matrix addition/subtraction/Multiplication

3.0 Strings, Functions & Pointers

3.1 Define String
3.2 Explain different functions used for reading and writing strings with examples
3.3 Explain the String manipulation functions strcat (), strcmp (), strcpy () and strlen () with
examples.
3.4 State the use of function in C
3.5 Explain declaration of a function in program
3.6 Write the operation of getchar (),getch (), getche () and putchar () functions
3.7 State the use of return statement.
3.8 Explain passing of parameters to the function
3.9 Write simple programs on functions call techniques
3.10 Define a pointer.
3.11 Declare a pointer, assign a pointer, initialize a pointer
3.12 Explain pointer arithmetic operations with examples
3.13 Differentiate address and dereferencing operators.

4.0 Structures & unions

4.1 Define a structure in C
4.2 Write the syntax of structure declaration and explain
4.3 Explain the method of declaring a structure variable
4.4 Explain the method of initializing a structure variable
4.5 Explain the method of accessing of members of a structure

133
4.6 Illustrate structures with a program to read & print a book database consisting of Title of
book, author, no. of pages, price as fields
4.7 Explain how to find size of a structure
4.8 Define a Union
4.9 Differentiate between structure and union
4.10 State the function of pre-processor directives in C
4.11 List the six pre-processor directives.
4.12 Explain the conditional pre-processor directives with examples
4.13 Explain the unconditional pre-processor directives with examples

5.0 Basics of MATLAB

5.1 State the need for MATLAB in solving engineering problems
5.2 List the major differences between C and MATLAB
5.3 List the arithmetic operators, relational operators, logical operators in MATLAB
5.4 Differentiate element wise multiplication/division/power operations and array
multiplication/division/power operations
5.5 State the usage of
i) linspace operator
ii) clc, clear, who, whos commands
5.6 Give the syntax and usage of decision-makingstatements:i) if…end statement;
ii) if..else..end statement used in MATLAB
5.7 Give the syntax and usage of loop statements:i) while loop ii) for loop used in MATLAB
5.8 Explain the creation 1D & 2D arrays and mXn matrices in MATLAB
5.9 Illustrate with an example the matrix operations such as:i) addition; ii) subtraction;
iii) multiplication; iv) transpose and v) inverse using MATLAB
5.10 List the common input/output functions in MATLAB.
5.11 Illustrate plot commands such as: i) plot (x, y); ii) fplot () iii) title (); iv) xlabel (); v) ylabel ();
vi) ezplot () vii) subplot () viii) bar () ix) pie () in MATLAB
5.12 State the usage of:
i) SIMULINK
ii) GUI

COURSE CONTENT

1. C-Programming Basics

Structure of a C program - Character Set –keywords – Data types -Constants, Variables –

Arithmetic operators- evaluation of expression– Assignment statement –Nested assignment
statement – Compound assignment operators- Increment, Decrement operators- printf () and
scanf () functions – Operator precedence – Relational, Logical, Bitwise logical operators

134
 2. Conditional Statements and arrays

Conditional expression- conditional statements - If, If-else, Nested If else–Switch case

statement- iterative statements: -While, for, do-while- Break, Continue -Nested loops - -1D
Array declaration, Initialization - 2D Array declaration, Initialization -Accessing of Array
elements

3. Strings, Functions & pointers

Define string - Reading and writing strings –String manipulation functions –function call -
Return statement, passing parameters to function- Function calls - Pointer declaration-
address and dereferencing operators.

4. Structures & Unions

Structure features - structure variable, declaration and Initialization - Accessing of Structure

members- Unions -differentiate structure and union – Pre-processor directives

5. Basics of MATLAB

Need for MATLAB - Difference between MATLAB and C -Arithmetic, relational, logical
operators- element wise multiplication/division/power operations and array
multiplication/division/power operations –linespaceoperator – clc,clear,who,whos
commands-decision making statements -
Loop statements –arrays and matrices -working with matrices –input/output functions –
plotting commands- SIMULINK-GUI

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. BalaguruSwamy.E, Programming in ANSI C, 3rd Edition, TMH

2. Kamthane, Programming with ANSI and Turbo C, Pearson Education
3. Gottfried (Schaum Series), Programming in C, McGraw Hill
4. ReemaThareja, Programming in C by, Oxford university press.
5. YashwantKanetkar, Let us C, BPB Publication, New Delhi
6. Pratap,Getting Started with MATLAB: A Quick Introduction for Scientists and Engineers,
Oxford University Press
7. Ram N.Patel,AnkushMittal,Programing in MATLAB: a problem-solvingapproach, PERSON

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.10
Unit Test-II From 3.11 to 5.12

135
 EC-307, ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-I AND NETWORK ANALYSIS LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Electronic Circuits-I and
EC-307 4 60 40 60
Network Analysis Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Rectifiers and Power supplies 16 CO1

2 Amplifiers and oscillators 16 CO2
3 Resonance and Network Theorems 16 CO3

4 Circuit simulation using Pspice or equivalent 12

CO4
TOTAL 60

1. To construct and measure various parameters of rectifiers.

Course 2 To construct and measure various parameters of amplifiers and Oscillators.
Objectives 3.To construct and verify the network theorems
4. To simulate rectifiers, amplifiers and Oscillator circuits using simulation
software.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-307.1 Construct the rectifiers and obtain different parameters.
Construct the Amplifiers and obtain different parameters.
CO2 EC-307.2 Construct Oscillators, obtain output waveform and calculate output
frequency.
CO3 EC-307.3 Construct the circuits for different theorems and verify
CO4 EC-307.4 Simulate rectifiers, amplifiers and Oscillators using P-spice or equivalent.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-307.1 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
EC-307.2 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
EC-307.3 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
EC-307.4 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
Average 3 2 2 1.5 1 2 2 3 1.5 2.25

3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped

136
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Rectifiers and Power supplies

1. Obtain output waveforms and measure DC o/p voltage, ripple voltage of a Bridge rectifier
with/ without filter at different loads and compare with that of theoretical values
2. Obtain the voltage regulation characteristics of Zener regulator
3. Obtain the voltage regulation characteristics of IC regulator (78XX,79XX, LM317)
4. Construct and test the regulated power supply for any given DC voltage using 78XX/79XX

2.0 Amplifiers and Oscillators

5. (i)Plot the frequency response characteristics of a transformer coupled CE Amplifier

(ii)Plot the frequency response characteristics of a RC coupled Amplifier
6. Implement Colpitt’s oscillator/Hartley oscillator and verify the effect of varying the tank
circuit component values and observe output waveforms on CRO.
7. Construct Crystal oscillator and observe output waveforms on CRO
8. Construct RC Phase shift oscillator and verify the effect of varying the RC component values
and observe output waveforms on CRO

3.0 Resonance and Network Theorems

9. Construct RLC series resonance circuit and draw its frequency response
10. Construct a parallel resonance circuit and draw its frequency response
11. Perform an experiment to verify super position theorem
12. Perform an experiment to verify maximum power transfer theorem.

4.0 Circuit simulation using PSPICE or equivalent software

13. Simulate Zener regulator circuit and assess the performance for various loads
14. Simulate of CE amplifier and observe the effect of disconnecting bypass capacitor
15. Simulate RC phase shift oscillator circuit and observe the effect of change in component
values

-0o0-

137
 EC-308, DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-308 Digital Electronics lab 3 45 40 60

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Logic Gates 6 CO1

2 Combinational logic circuits 15 CO2

3 Sequential Logic Circuits 15 CO3

Practice Using PspiceOrcad Tool Software CO4

4 09

TOTAL 45

1. To construct different combinational, sequential logic circuits and obtain truth tables.
Course
2. To simulate combinational and sequential logic circuits using simulation software
Objectives
3. To learn the practical importance of Digital Electronic Circuits.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-308.1
Test the truth tables of logic gates.
CO2 EC-308.2 Construct combinational logic circuits and verify truth tables.
CO3 EC-308.3 Construct Sequential logic circuits and verify truth tables.
Simulate combinational and sequential logic circuits using P-spice or
CO4 EC-308.4
equivalent.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-308.1 3 1 2 2 2 3 2
EC-308.2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
EC-308.3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
EC-308.4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
Average 3 1.75 2 3 2 2 3 3 2.3 2

3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

138
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

Logic Gates
1. Verify the truth tables of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR Gates
2. Realize AND, OR, NOT, XOR gates using 2 input NAND and NOR Gates

Combinational logic circuits

3. Implement Half adder and full adder circuits using TTL/CMOS gates, and verify the truth
tables
4. Verify the function of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485 IC
5. Verify the truth table of Multiplexer IC 74153/74151 etc.
6. Verify the truth table of BCD to 7 segment Decoder 7448 IC
7. Verify the Truth table of 74148 Encoder & 74138 Decoder IC

Sequential Logic Circuits

8. Verify the truth tables RS, JK, T and D Flip-flops
9. Construct a ripple counter using JK-FFs and obtain its timing waveforms
10. Verify the function of 7490 as decade and modulus counter, obtain timing waveforms.
11. verify the function of up/down counter using 74190/ 74193, change the modulus of the
counter and verify
12. Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495, 74194 etc.)

Practice Using PSPICE Software

13. Simulate AND, OR, NOT, EX-OR Gates Using Universal Gates (ICs 7400 and 7402).
14. Simulate HalfAdder and Full Adder Circuits Using ICs 7408,7486, and 7432
15. Simulate 8 × 1 Multiplexer Using IC 74153

-0o0-

139
 EC-309, ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Analog and Digital
EC-309 Communication systems 3 45 40 60
Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Analog Communication 15 CO1

2 Digital Communication 18 CO2

Simulation of Analog Communication
3 systems using PSPICE or equivalent 6 CO3
software
Simulation of Digital Communication
4 systems using PSPICE or equivalent 6 CO4
software
TOTAL 45

1. To familiarisation with analog and digital modulation and demodulation techniques.

Course
Objectives 2. To simulate Analog and Digital modulation circuits using simulation software.

3. To learn the practical importance of Analog and Digital modulation.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Construct AM, FM, PAM, PWM, PPM modulation and demodulation circuits
CO1 EC-309.1
and observe waveforms.
Construct PCM, ASK, FSK, PSK modulator and demodulation circuits and
CO2 EC-309.2
TDM, FDM circuits and observe waveforms.
CO3 EC-309.3 Simulate Analog modulation circuits using P-spice or equivalent.
CO4 EC-309.4 Simulate Digital modulation circuits using P-spice or equivalent.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-309.1 3 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
EC-309.2 3 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
EC-309.3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
EC-309.4 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
Average 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

140
ANALOG COMMUNICATION

1. Conduct an experiment to observe AM waveform and determine Modulation index using CRO.
2. Conduct an experiment to observe FM waveform.
3. Verify and observe Pulse amplitude modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
4. Verify and observe Pulse Width modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
5. Observe pulse position modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

6. Set up a Pulse code modulator/ Demodulator circuit and observe the waveforms.
7. Set up an ASK modulator and demodulator and observe the waveforms.
8. Set up an FSK modulator and demodulator and observe the waveforms
9. Set up a PSK modulator and demodulator and observe the waveforms
10. Perform an experiment on Time Division Multiplexing/ De-multiplexing circuit and observe the
waveforms.
11. Perform an experiment on Frequency Division Multiplexing/ De-multiplexing circuit and
observe the waveforms.

Simulation using PSPICE or equivalent software

12. Connect a circuit to generate AM waveform and determine Modulation index

13. Connect a circuit to generate Pulse amplitude modulation and observe waveforms
14. Connect a circuit to generate Pulse Width modulation and observe waveforms
15. Set up an ASK modulator and demodulator and observe the waveforms.
16. Set up an FSK modulator and demodulator and observe the waveforms

-0o0-

141
 EC-310, PROGRAMMING IN C & MATLAB PRACTICE LAB

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
Programming in C & MATLAB Practice
EC-310 03 45 40 60
Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

C compiler Basics, programs on Decision &

1 9
Loop Control Statements CO1
2 Programs on functions, Arrays, Strings in C 9 CO2
Programs on Pointers, Structures and Unions
3 9
in C CO3
4 MATLAB Practice 18
CO4
Total 45

1. To familiarize with programming in C and MATLAB

Course Objectives 2. To understand the programming concepts of C and MATLAB
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of programming in C and
MATLAB.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Describe the usage of C Compiler, programs on Decision& Loop Control
CO1 EC-310.1
Statements
CO2 EC-310.2 Apply functions, arrays and strings in C language
CO3 EC-310.3 Apply pointers, structures and unions in C Language.
CO4 EC-310.4 Practice on basics of MATLAB.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-310.1 3 2 2 3 1
EC-310.2 3 2 2 1 3 1 1
EC-310.3 3 2 2 1 3 1 1
EC-310.4 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 3 1
Average 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 1.5 1

3=strongly mapped
2=moderately mapped
1=slightly mapped

142
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. C Programming Basics
1. Familiarize with turbo C Compiler or equivalent compiler features
2. Practice formatted Input / Output (printf and scanf) functions.
3. Practice with various operators in C

II. Decision & Loop Control Statements

4. Practice with decision & control (if, if-else, nested if –else) Statements
5. Practice with decision control (Switch –case structure) statements
6. Practice with loop control Statements

III. Exercises on functions

7. Practice the use of functions in C

IV. Arrays, Strings and Pointers in C

8. Write and run small programs using single dimensional integer arrays
9. Write and run small programs using multidimensional integer arrays
10. Write and run small programs using string functions for string comparison, copying and
concatenation
11. Write and run small programs using with pointers in 'C'

V. Structures and Unions

12. Write and run small programs using Structures& Unions in C

VI. MAT LAB PRACTICE

13. Familiarize with MATLAB Compiler environment, command line arguments, HELP and know
about various tool boxes available in MATLAB
14. Write simple programs on decision making statements (if-end, if-else-end, nested if –else-
end)
15. Write simple programs on loop control statements (while, for loops)
16. Write simple programs to create simple 1D & 2D arrays and perform addition & subtraction
operations
17. Write simple programs to create 3X3 matrixes and perform:i) addition; ii) subtraction; iii)
multiplication; iv) transpose and v) inverse operations
18. Write simple programs to illustrate plot commands such as: i) plot (x, y); ii) fplot () iii) title ();
iv) xlabel (); v) ylabel (); vi) legend () in MATLAB
19. Know the procedure to convert MATLAB program to C code

-0o0-

143
IV Semester

144
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
IV SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Periods End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical / Sem Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Electronic
EC-401 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Circuits-II
Microcontrollers
EC-402 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Interfacing
Microwave &
Satellite
EC-403 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communication
systems
EC-404 IoT and Sensors 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Digital Logic
EC-405 Design through 5 75 3 20 80 100
Verilog HDL
PRACTICAL
Electronic
EC-406 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Circuits-II Lab
Microcontrollers
EC-407 and Interfacing - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Communication
EC-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
skills Lab
IoT and Sensors
EC-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Digital Logic
EC-410 Design through - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Verilog HDL Lab
Activities 3 45 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 630 - 300 700 1000
Note: EC-408 is common with all branches

145
 EC-401, ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS -II

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
EC-401 Electronic Circuits -II 05 75 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 Wave shaping Circuits 15 23 1 2 CO1
2 Linear Integrated Circuits 15 19 3 1 CO2
3 Op-Amp Applications 20 26 2 2 CO3
4 Timers and PLL 13 26 2 2 CO4
5 A/D & D/A Converters 12 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To learn the principles and working of Linear ICs, A/D and D/A converters
and wave shaping circuits.
Course Objectives
2. To analyse the applications of linear ICs.
3. To learn the practical importance of Linear ICs and wave shaping circuits

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-401.1 Describe different wave shaping circuits.
CO2 EC-401.2 Describe lC manufacturing technologies and principles of OP-AMP
CO3 EC-401.3 Analyse the OP-Amp application circuits.
CO4 EC-401.4 Analyse the timer and PLL circuits.
CO5 EC-401.5 Describe Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog converters.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-401.1 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1
EC-401.2 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 1
EC-401.3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
EC-401.4 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2
EC-401.5 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 2.4 2.2 1 3 2.4 2

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

146
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Wave Shaping Circuits

1.1 Explain the need of wave shaping circuits
1.2 List different linear and non-linear wave shaping circuits
1.3 Explain RC differentiator circuit with wave forms
1.4 Explain RC integrator circuit with wave forms
1.5 Classify clippers.
1.6 Explain the working of different unbiased diode clipper circuits
1.7 Explain the working of different biased diode clipper circuits
1.8 Explain the double ended diode clipper with waveforms
1.9 Explain the working of transistor clipper with wave forms
1.10 Explain the working of Zener diode clipper with wave forms
1.11 Explain the working of clamper circuit
1.12 List the applications of clippers and clampers

2.0 Linear Integrated Circuits

2.1 List the advantages and disadvantages of Integrated Circuits over discrete circuits.
2.2 Distinguish between linear and digital ICs
2.3 Classify ICs based on manufacturing process (monolithic, thin film, thick film and hybrid).
2.4 List different IC packages and Draw their shapes
2.5 State various levels of integration of Integrated circuits.
2.6 i)State the features of Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
ii) List any 6 merits of SMT Technology.
2.7 Explain the working of differential amplifier constructed using BJTs.
2.8 i) Explain the functional block diagram of an operational amplifier.
ii) Draw the circuit symbol of an operational amplifier.
2.9 i) List the characteristics of ideal operational amplifier.
ii) Define the terms: Input impedance, Open loop gain, slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage,
Input offset Current and give the typical values of each.
2.10 Draw the pin diagram of IC 741 and state the function of each pin
2.11 State the concept of virtual ground.
2.12 i) Explain the function of Op Amp as Inverting amplifier with a circuit diagram.
ii) Derive the expression for voltage gain of Inverting amplifier
2.13 i) Explain the Non-Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp.
ii) Derive the equation for Voltage gain of the non-Inverting amplifier
3.0 Op-Amp Applications
3.1 Explain the function of OP-Amp as: i) Summer ii) Scale changer
iii) Integrator and iv) Differentiator
3.2 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Wein-bridge Oscillator circuit
3.3 State the conditions required for stable operation of above circuit
3.4 Explain the working of OP-Amp based RC Phase shift oscillator circuit
3.5 Define Sweep Voltage and state its use as time-base
3.6 Distinguish between voltage and current time-base generators and list their applications.

147
 3.7 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Bootstrap sweep circuit.
3.8 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Miller sweep circuit
3.9 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Astable multi-vibrator with waveforms.
3.10 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Monostable multi-vibrator with waveforms
3.11 Explain the working of OP-Amp based Schmitt trigger circuit with waveforms
3.12 Explain the Voltage to current converter circuit.
3.13 List any three applications of Voltage to current converter.
3.14 i) Explain the Current to Voltage converter circuit.
ii) List any three applications of Current to Voltage converter.
4.0 Timers and PLL
4.1 Draw the pin diagram of 555 IC and state the function of each pin
4.2 Draw the internal block diagram of 555 IC and explain the function of each block.
4.3 Draw the circuit of a stable multi-vibrator using 555 IC and explain its working
4.4 Explain the concept of Phase locked loop
4.5 Draw internal block diagram of PLL – LM565 and explain its working
4.6 Explain the operation of VCO (LM566)
4.7 Define lock range of PLL
4.8 Define capture range of PLL.
4.9 List any three applications of PLL
4.10 Explain frequency multiplier and FM demodulator using PLL

5.0 A/D & D/A Converters.

5.1 State the need for A/D and D/A conversion.
5.2 Define the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter.
5.3 Explain D/A conversion using binary weighted resistors.
5.4 Explain D/A conversion using R-2R ladder network.
5.5 Explain A/D conversion using counter method.
5.6 Explain A/D conversion using successive approximation method
5.7 List IC numbers of any three ADCs
5.8 List IC numbers of any three DACs

COURSE CONTENTS:

1. Wave Shaping Circuits

Need of wave shaping circuit- Linear and non-linear wave shaping networks - RC
differentiator circuit - wave forms - RC integrator circuit - wave forms - classification of
clippers - working of biased and un biased diode clipper circuits – Transistor clipper circuits –
Zener diode clipper circuits - clamper circuit - applications of clippers and clampers

2. Linear Integrated Circuits

advantages and disadvantages of Integrated circuits over discrete circuits- Distinguish linear,
digital ICs- Classifications of ICs based on manufacturing process -IC packages –Levels of
integration – SMT- - Operational amplifiers– circuit symbol –block diagram – Input
impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage, Input offset Current – IC
741- Pin diagram- Virtual ground –– OpAmp as inverting amplifier &non inverting amplifier

148
 3. Op-Amp Applications–OP-Amp as summer, scale changer, integrator, differentiator- Wein
bridge oscillator –RC Phase shift oscillator - Voltage and current time base generators-
Bootstrap & Miller sweep circuits – A stable, Monostablemultivibrators- Schmitt trigger-–
Voltage to current converter- applications – current to voltage converter- Applications

4 Timers and PLL

555 IC Pin diagram- Internal block diagram - 555 Timer as A stableMultivibrator – Phase
locked loop –PLL-LM 565 block diagram & working- voltage Control Oscillators (LM 566) –
Lock range of PLL – Capture range of PLL – Design rules for PLL – applications - frequency
multiplier and FM demodulator using PLL

5 A/D & D/A Converters

Need for A/D and D/A conversion -Resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of
D/A converter - D/A conversion using binary weighted resistors, R-2R ladder network - A/D
conversion using counter method and successive approximation method - IC numbers of any
three ADCs, DACs

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bogart, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH
2. Milliman and Hallkias, Integrated Electronics, TMH
3. RamakanthA.Gaykwad,Opamps& Linear Integrated Circuits, 4thedition,PRENTICE Hall
4. D Roy Chowdary, Linear Integrated Circuits, 4th edition,
5. George Clayton, Operational Amplifiers, 5th edition, Newnes
6. Willam D. Stanley,Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, 4th Edition, PEARSON
7. Dr.Sanjaysarma,OPamps&LIC, Katsonbooks
8. Johanhuijsing, Operational Amplifiers theory & Design, 3rdEdition,SPRINGER Publications

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8
Unit Test-II From 3.9 to 5.8

149
 MICROCONTROLLERS AND INTERFACING
Course No of Total no Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
Microcontrollers and
EC-402 05 75 20 80
Interfacing

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Architecture of
1 20 26 2 2 CO1
Microcontroller 8051
Instruction set of 8051
2 15 26 2 2 CO2
microcontrollers
8051 Programming
3 15 26 2 2 CO3
Concepts
Interfacing Simple I/O
4 15 16 2 1 CO4
devices
Programming in
5 10 16 2 1 CO5
Embedded C
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To familiarize with various microcontrollers

Course
2. To understand the programming and applications of 8051 microcontrollers
Objectives
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of Microcontrollers.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-402.1 Describe the Architecture of 8051 microcontroller
CO2 EC-402.2 Explain the instruction set of 8051 microcontrollers
CO3 EC-402.3 Analyse 8051 programming for Arithmetic and Logical operations
Describe the Interfacing techniques of I/O devices with 8051
CO4 EC-402.4
microcontrollers.
CO5 EC-402.5 Analyse 8051 programming using Embedded C.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-402.1 3 3
EC-402.2 3 3 3
EC-402.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-402.4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
EC-402.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 3 2.5 3 3 3
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

150
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Architecture of Microcontroller 8051

1.1 List the features of microcontrollers.
1.2 Compare microprocessors and microcontrollers
1.3 State the details of 8051 microcontroller family chips
1.4 Draw the functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller and state the function of each
block
1.5 Draw the pin diagram of 8051 microcontroller and specify the purpose of each pin
1.6 Explain the internal memory organization of 8051 with suitable diagram
1.7 Explain the external memory organization of 8051
1.8 List various special function registers of 8051 and state their functions
1.9 Explain PSW register of 8051
1.10 Explain the SFRs associated with timer/counters of 8051
1.11 Explain the modes of operations of counters & timers in 8051
1.12 List the interrupts of 8051
1.13 Explain the SFRs associated with interrupts of 8051
1.14 Explain the SFRs associated with serial communication of 8051
1.15 List the modes of operation of serial communication with 8051
1.16 Describe various I/O ports of 8051

2.0 Instruction set of 8051 micro controllers

2.1 State the need for an instruction set
2.2 Mention the instruction format of 8051
2.3 State the terms operation code, operand and illustrate these terms by writing an instruction
2.4 Define fetch cycle, execution cycle and instruction cycle.
2.5 Distinguish between machine cycle and T-state.
2.6 Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics.
2.7 Classify the 8051 instructions into one byte, two byte and three-byte instructions
2.8 Classify the 8051 instructions based on their function
2.9 List the various addressing modes of 8051and explain them with examples.
2.10 Explain various data transfer group of instructions of 8051 with examples
2.11 Explain various arithmetic instructions of 8051
2.12 State the effect of arithmetic operations on flags of 8051 with examples
2.13 Explain the logic instructions and recognize the flags that are set or reset for given data
conditions
2.14 List various bit manipulation instructions of 8051 and illustrate with examples
2.15 Explain unconditional jump instructions of 8051
2.16 Explain conditional jump instructions of 8051
2.17 Explain CALL and RET instructions of 8051
2.18 State the use of NOP instruction of 8051

3.0 8051 Programming Concepts using assembly language

3.1 List the various symbols used in drawing flow charts
3.2 Write programs in 8051 assembly language to illustrate the application of data copy
instructions
3.3 Write programs in 8051 assembly language to perform single byte and double byte addition
and subtraction.
3.4 Write programs in 8051 assembly language which use jump instructions

151
 3.5 Write a delay subroutine to introduce time delay of given time period (in milliseconds) without
using 8051 internal timers.
3.6 Write a program to introduce time delay of given time period (in milliseconds) using 8051
internal timer.
3.7 Define a subroutine and state its use.
3.8 Explain the sequence of program when subroutine is called and executed.
3.9 Explain information exchange between the program counter and the stack and identification
of stack pointer register when a subroutine is called and executed.
3.10 Illustrate PUSH, POP instructions with an example.
3.11 Define the term debugging a program
3.12 Explain the principles of single step and break point debugging techniques

4.0 Interfacing Simple I/O devices

4.1 Explain the Interfacing concepts of push button switches and LEDs with 8051
4.2 Draw a diagram to connect an LED to a port pin and write an8051-assembly language program
to blink it with a given time delay.
4.3 Interface a common cathode/anode seven segment display with 8051 and write a program to
display a given decimal number
4.4 List reasons for the popularity of LCDs
4.5 State the functions of pins of 16×2 LCD module
4.6 List the instruction command codes for programming 16×2 LCD module
4.7 Explain Interfacing of 16×2 LCD module to 8051
4.8 Write an 8051 ALP to display a given message on 16×2 LCD module
4.9 Describe key bouncing problem and de-bouncing solutions
4.10 Explain the Interfacing concepts of a 4x4 Matrix Key Board with 8051 with diagram
4.11 Explain the interfacing concepts of stepper motor with 8051 and write a program to run the
motor continuously
4.12 Interface 8051 with Relay to drive a lamp

5.0 Programming using Embedded C

5.1 List the differences between C and Embedded C
5.2 List the reasons for writing programs in Embedded C
5.3 Explain the C data types for 8051
5.4 Write an 8051 C program to store the data in the accumulator
5.5 Write a program to load three numbers into Accumulator and send them to port 1
5.6 Write an 8051 C program to send values 00 – FF to port P1
5.7 Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of P1 continuously.
5.8 Write an 8051 C program to toggle bits of P1 ports continuously with 250 ms.
5.9 Write a C program for 8051 to transfer the letter “A” serially at 9600 baud continuously. Use 8-
bit data and 1 stop bit.
5.10 Write an 8051 C program to toggle all the bits of port P1 continuously with some delay in
between. Use Timer 0, 16-bit mode to generate the delay.

152
COURSE CONTENTS:

1. Architecture of Microcontroller 8051

Features of micro controllers, Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, block diagram of
8051 microcontroller, pin diagram of 8051 microcontroller, internal memory & external
memory organizations, various special function registers, PSW, SFRs,counters& timers,
interrupts in 8051, Serial communication of 8051, I/O ports of 8051,

2. Instruction set of 8051 micro controllers

Need for an instruction set, instruction format of 8051, opcode, operand, machine cycle and T-
state, major groups in the instruction set, various addressing modes of 8051, data transfer,
arithmetic, logical, branching and Boolean instructions, one byte, two byte and three-
byteinstructions, unconditional and conditional jump instructions, CALL and RET instructions,
NOP instruction
3. 8051 Programming Concepts
Various symbols used in drawing flow charts, programs in mnemonics to illustrate the
application of data copy instructions, programs to perform single byte, double byte and multi
byte addition and subtraction, the application of jump instruction in the program, program
using delay subroutines, subroutine and its use, PUSH, POP instructions, single step and break
point debugging techniques.
4. Interfacing Simple I/O devices
Interfacing of push button switches and LEDs, seven segment display interface, functions of pins
of LCD, Interfacing 16x2 LCD to 8051, Program LCD in assembly language, Interfacing of a 4x4
Matrix Key Board, key bouncing problem and de-bouncing solutions
5. Programming using Embedded C
Introduction to Embedded C, Compare C and Embedded C, Data types, Embedded C Programs

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mazidi and Mazidi, The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C,
2nd edition Pearson
2. Kenneth J. Ayala, 8051 Microcontroller
3. MykePredko , Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller,TMH
4. Ajay V Deshmukh , Microcontrollers (theory andapplications)
5. Subratha Ghospal,8051 Microcontroller (Instruction, programme & interfacing), PEARSON
6. Kenneth Ayalla,The 8051 Microcontroller, 3rd Edition, CENGAGE learning India Edition
7. Dr. Rajiv Kapadia,8051 Microcontroller Embedded systems, Jico student Edition

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.16
Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.14

153
 EC-403, MICROWAVE & SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
Microwave & Satellite
EC-403 05 75 20 80
Communication Systems
No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Transmission Lines and
1 17 21 2 1.5 CO1
Wave Propagation
2 Antennas 16 21 2 1.5 CO2
Microwave Components
3 20 26 2 2 CO3
and Devices
4 RADARs 12 26 2 2 CO4
Satellite Communication
5 10 16 2 1 CO5
System
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To familiarize the concepts of Microwave Engineering, Radar and Satellite

communication systems.
2. To equip with various issues related to Microwave Engineering, Radar and
Course Objectives
Satellite communication systems.
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of Microwave
Engineering, Radar and Satellite communication systems.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-403.1 Describe the transmission Lines and wave propagation.
CO2 EC-403.2 Interpretthe Radiation patterns of various Antennas.
CO3 EC-403.3 Analyse various microwave components and devices.
CO4 EC-403.4 Analyse the Radar Engineering.
CO5 EC-403.5 Describe the principles of Satellite communication.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-403.1 3 1 3 1
EC-403.2 3 2 1 2 3 1
EC-403.3 3 1 1 1 3 1
EC-403.4 3 3 2 1 2 3 2
EC-403.5 3 3 1 2 3 1 3 1 2
Average 3 1.8 1.25 1.5 1.8 3 1 1.5
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

154
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Transmission lines and wave propagation

1.1 Introduction to transmission lines and different types.
1.2 Draw the electrical equivalent of transmission line.
1.3 Define the primary and secondary constants of a transmission line.
1.4 Explain the significance of characteristic impedance and Propagation constant of a
transmission line.
1.5 Define reflection coefficient and standing wave ratio and give the relation between them.
1.6 Explain the concept of Reflection, Refraction and diffraction of EM waves.
1.7 Explain the Ground wave propagation with the equation for electric filed at a distant place.
1.8 List the applications and limitations of ground wave propagation
1.9 Classify different layers of ionosphere and briefly explain them
1.10 Explain the ionospheric wave (sky wave) propagation
1.11 Define the terms
i) Critical Frequency ii) MUF iii) Skip Distance iv) Skip Zone v) Actual height and vi) Virtual
height of an Ionosphere
1.12 Explain Space wave (trophospheric wave) propagation and factors affecting space wave
propagation (LOS)
1.13 Briefly explain i) Duct propagation & ii) Tropospheric Scatter Propagation

2.0 Antennas
2.1 Explain the principle of radiation of EM waves from antennas
2.2 Explain radiation mechanism of an antenna from transmission line theory
2.3 State the following parameters of antenna
i. Radiation pattern
ii. Front to back ratio
iii. Directive gain
iv. Directivity
v. Power gain
vi. Beamwidth
vii. Bandwidth
viii. Antenna resistance: Radiation and Loss Resistance
ix. Antenna efficiency
x. Antenna aperture (Effective area)
xi. Antenna polarization
2.4 Explain Isotropic radiator
2.5 Classify antennas based on i) Radiation pattern ii) Frequency range iii) Construction
iv) Bandwidth
2.6 Explain the function of dipole and folded dipole antennas and give their applications
2.7 List different microwave antennas
2.8 Explain different horn antennas and give its applications
2.9 Explain the construction and working principle of Parabolic Dish antenna
2.10 State the need of antenna arrays

155
 2.11 Explain about end-fire array and broadside array
2.12 Introduction to smart antennas
2.13 Working of smart antennas
2.14 Main types of smart antennas (Switched beam and Adaptive array)
2.15 Applications and Advantages of smart antennas.

3.0. Microwave Components and Devices

3.1 Define microwave frequencies
3.2 State the different microwave frequency bands and their applications
3.3 State the function of waveguides and classify them
3.4 Explain the concept of propagation of wave in rectangular waveguides
3.5 Define TE (Transverse Electric) Mode and TM (Transverse Magnetic) Mode
3.6 Define the terms: i) dominant mode, ii) cut-off wavelength, iii) cut-off frequency iv) phase
velocity and v) group velocity related to waveguides
3.7 List different Microwave passive devices
3.8 State the uses of i) T-junctions: E-Plane T, H-Plane T & Hybrid T ii) Microwave Bends iii)
Microwave tapers iv) Microwave Twist
3.9 Explain the working principle of Reflex Klystron
3.10 Explain the working principle of Magnetron and state its applications
3.11 Explain the working principle of Travelling Wave Tube and state its applications
3.12 List different microwave solid state devices
3.13 Explain the working of Gunn diode
3.14 Explain the working IMPATT diode.

4.0 RADARs
4.1 State the basic working principle of a RADAR
4.2 Derive the free space RADAR range equation
4.3 Explain the factors affecting range of a RADAR
4.4 Classify RADARs
4.5 Draw the block diagram of a pulse RADAR and explain the function of each block
4.6 State the major advantages & disadvantages of a pulsed RADAR system
4.7 State the need of duplexer
4.8 List the various displays used in RADAR
4.9 Draw and explain the block diagram of continuous wave (CW) RADAR
4.10 Explain the Doppler Effect
4.11 Draw and explain the moving target indicating (MTI) RADAR
4.12 Briefly explain the concept of blind speed
4.13 List the applications of RADARs

5.0 Satellite Communication System

5.1 State the need for satellite communication
5.2 List the advantages of satellite communication system over terrestrial communication system
5.3 Explain uplink and down link frequencies
5.4 List various types of satellites (LEOs, MEOs and GEOs)
5.5 List the advantages of Geosynchronous satellites
5.6 Draw and explain block diagram of a satellite communication system (Satellite on board)
5.7 Draw the block diagram of earth station and explain each block.

156
5.8 List the functions of the satellite transponder.
5.9 Explain various types of transponders used in satellite.
5.10 Explain the bandwidth of satellite system.
5.11 Explain the application of satellite in GPS (Global Position System).
5.12 Explain the application of satellite in Direct to Home (DTH) TV.

COURSE CONTENTS:

1 Transmission lines and Wave Propagation

Transmission lines-Primary and Secondary constants-reflection coefficient-standing wave ration-

Effects of environment-Ground wave propagation -Applications, limitations - layers of ionosphere -
sky wave propagation- Actual height, Virtual height, Critical frequency - Maximum usable frequency-
Skip distance, Skip zone (dead zone)-Space wave (trophospheric wave) propagation-Duct
propagation & ii) Tropospheric scattering

2 Antennas

Radiation of EM waves from antennas- Isotropic radiator - Classify antennas - Antenna Parameters -
dipole and folded dipole antennas- different microwave antennas- Horn antenna - Parabolic
reflector – end fire array and Broadside array-smart antennas

3 Microwave Components and Devices

Microwave frequencies - rectangular wave guides - TE (Transverse Electric) Mode and TM

(Transverse Magnetic) Mode- T-junctions - Microwave Bends - Microwave tapers- Reflex Klystron -
Magnetron- Travelling Wave Tube- microwave solid state devices - Gunn diode - IMPATT diode.

4 RADARs

Working principle of a RADAR- Radar Range Equation- Pulse Radar -need of duplexer –displays of
RADAR-Continuous Wave (CW) Radar- Doppler Effect - Moving Target Indicating (MTI) Radar – blind
speed – Applications of RADARs

5 Satellite Communication Systems

Block diagram of a satellite communications system- Advantages - block diagram of earth station-
satellite transponders –bandwidth of satellite-application of satellite in GPS (Global Position System),
Direct to Home (DTH) TV.

Reference Books:

1. F.E.Terman, Electronic and Radio engineering, McGraw Hill Publishers

2. George F Kenndy, Electronic communication system, McGraw Hill Publishers
3. AthanasiosG.Kanatas, AthanasiosD.Panagopopulos, Radio Wave Propagation and channel
modelling for earth-space systems, CRC Press
4. UmeshSinha, Networks and Transmission lines, SatyaPrakashan, Tech India Publications,
New Delhi, 2001.

157
 5. Ian A. Glover, Steve pennock, Microwave Devices, circuits and subsystems for
Communication engineering, Wiley-Blackwell Publishers
6. Samuel Y. Liao, Microwave Devices and Circuits, Pearson Publishers
7. G.S.N. Raju, Microwave devices, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
8. E.V.D. Glazier and H.R.L. Lamont, Transmission and Propagation, The Services Text Book of
Radio, vol. 5, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi.
9. K D Prasad, Antenna Theory, SatyaPrakashan, Tech India Publications, New Delhi, 2001.
10. A.V. Bakshi, Transmission line and waveguides, Technical Publications, 2009
11. MojojitMitra, Satellite communication, PHI
12. Michael O Kolawole, Satellite communication Engineering, CRC Press

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.16
Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.14

158
 EC-404, IOT AND SENSORS

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
EC-404 IoTand Sensors 04 60 20 80

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Introduction to Industry
1 12 26 2 2 CO1
4.0 and Internet of Things
2 Elements of IoT 10 16 2 1 CO2
3 Sensors and Actuators 10 16 2 1 CO3
Connectivity
Technologies, computing
4 13 26 2 2 CO4
hardware and Software
components
5 IoT Case Studies 15 26 2 2 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

To Introduce Industry 4.0 and Internet of Things

Course Objectives To familiarise with Sensors and Actuators in connection with IoT
To familiarise with Connectivity Technologies, computing hardware and
Software components in connection with IoT and to explore case case studies

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-404.1 Introduce Industry 4.0 and Internet of Things
CO2 EC-404.2 Get acquientwith Elements of IoT
CO3 EC-404.3 Get acquientwith Sensors and Actuators in connection with IoT
Understand connectivity Technologies, computing hardware and Software
CO4 EC-404.4
components in connection with IoT
CO5 EC-404.5 Explore IoT Case Studies

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-404.1 3 1 3 1
EC-404.2 3 2 1 2 3 1
EC-404.3 3 1 1 1 3 1
EC-404.4 3 3 2 1 2 3 2
EC-404.5 3 3 1 2 3 1 3 1 2
Average 3 1.8 1.25 1.5 1.8 3 1 1.5
3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped , 1=slightly mapped

159
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Introduction to Industry 4.0 and Internet of Things

1.1Explain the concept of Industry 4.0 and its benefits.
1.2 Explain the components of futuristic industrial plant in industry 4.0 with a block diagram
1.3 Define IoT and state its role in Industry 4.0
1.4 List the goals of industry 4.0
1.5 List the advantages of industry 4.0
1.6 Explain what technologies are driving industry 4.0
1.7 Explain various challenges in industry 4.0
1.8 State the impact of IoT on businesses and society
1.9 List the applications of IoT in different industries.
1.10 Explain the concepts of differentIoT enabling Technologies such as: i) Wireless Sensor
networks ii) Cloud Computing iii) Big Data Analytics iv) Communication Protocols iv)
Embedded Systems
1.11 Explain the concepts of differentIoT Levels (IoT Level-1 to Level-5) and Development
Templates
1.12 Explain M2M and IoT Technology Fundamentals such as: i) Devices and Gateways ii) Data
Management iii) Business Process in IoT iv) Everything as a Service (XaaS)
1.13 State the role of cloud in IoT
1.14 State the Security aspects of IoT
2.0 Elements of IoT
2.1 State the elements of IoT such as: i) Sensors & Actuators ii) Edge Gateway iii)
Communication Protocols iv) computing hardware v) Software components and their use
2.2 Classify sensors used in IoT based on i) Passive & Active ii) Analog& digital iii) Scalar & vector
and give examples
2.3 List the common actuators used in IoT
2.4 State the role of edge gateway in IoT
2.5 State the function of computing hardware in IoT
2.6 Stae the purpose of communication protocols used in IoT
2.7 List different communication protocols used in IoT
2.8 List different software components used in IoT
2.9 Explain the functions of Sensors & actuators in IoT
2.10 Explain the function of software components in data storage and data analytics in IoT

3.0 Sensors and Actuators

3.1 List the common analog sensors used in IoT
3.2 List the common digital sensors used in IoT
3.3 State the functions and applications the following sensors: i) Temperature sensors ii)
Pressure sensors ii) Motion sensors iii) Level sensors iv) Image sensors v) Proximity sensors
vi) Water quality sensors vii) Chemical sensors viii) Gas sensors viiii) Smoke sensors ix)
Infrared (IR) sensors x) Acceleration sensors xi) Gyroscopic sensors xii) Humidity sensors xiii)
Optical sensors

160
 3.4 State the specifications of DHT11 temperature and humidity sensor module For Arduino
Raspberry Pi
3.5 State the specifications of BMP280 Pressure Sensor Module High Precision Arduino
3.6 State the specifications of MQ-2 Smoke/Gas Sensor Module for Arduino
3.7 State the specifications of HC-SR501 Adjust IrPyroelectric Infrared PIR Motion Sensor
Module for Arduino, ARM
3.8 State the function of the following actuators:i) Hydraulic Actuators ii) Pneumatic Actuators
iii) Electrical Actuators iv) Thermal/Magnetic actuators iv) Mechanical actuators

4.0 Connectivity Technologies, computing hardware and Software components

4.1. State the use of Standard Wireless Access connecting technologies such as i) WiFi ii) 2G, 3G and
standard LTE, 5G in IoT
4.2. State the use of Private Long Range – LoRA based platform, Zigbee, and SigFox.
4.3. State the use of MobileIoT Technologies – LTE-M, NB-IoT, and EC-GSM-IoT
4.4. State the specifications (coverage range, data rate) and IoT specific applications of the following
connecting technologies: i) WiFi ii) 2G iii) 3G iv) 4G v) 5G vi) LoRA based platform vii) Zigbee viii)
SigFox
4.5. What is NFC (Near Field Communication) and List its applications
4.6. Differences between NFC and Bluetooth and WiFi technologies
4.7. List the typical specifications and applications of i) WiFi ii) Bluetooth iii) Zigbee iv) GSM v) GPS
modules designed for Arduino, Raspberry Pi hardware platforms
4.8. Explain the use of Computing Hardware (Arduino, Raspberry Pi) in IoT

5.0 IoT Case Studies

5.1 Explain the IoT based system for Home Automation with block diagram

5.2 Explain the IoT based system for Smart lighting with block diagram

5.3 Explain the IoT based system for home intrusion detection with block diagram

5.4 Explain the IoT based system for Air pollution monitoring system with block diagram

5.5 Explain the IoT based system for Smart irrigation with block diagram

5.6 Explain the IoT based system for healthcare with block diagram

COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction to Industry 4.0 and Internet of Things
Concept of Industry 4.0 and its benefits- components of futuristic industrial plant in industry 4.0-
Define IoT and state its role in Industry 4.0-List the goals of industry 4.0- advantages of industry 4.0-
technologies driving industry 4.0-various challenges in industry 4.0- the impact of IoT on businesses
and society- applications of IoT in different industries- the concepts of different IoT enabling
Technologies - M2M and IoT Technology Fundamentals -role of cloud in IoT - the Security aspects of
IoT

161
2. Elements of IoT
Elements of IoT --classify sensors used in IoT - common actuators used in IoT- the role of edge
gateway in IoT- the function of computing hardware in IoT-the purpose of communication protocols
used in IoT- different communication protocols used in IoT- different software components used in
IoT- the functions of Sensors & actuators in IoT- the function of software components in data
storage and data analytics in IoT-sensors and Actuators-Connectivity Technologies, computing
hardware and Software components
3. Sensors and Actuators
List the common analog sensors used in IoT -List the common digital sensors used in IoT-State the
function the following sensors :i)Temperature sensors ii) Pressure sensors ii) Motion sensors iii) Level
sensors iv) Image sensors v) Proximity sensors vi) Water quality sensors vii) Chemical sensors viii)
Gas sensors viiii) Smoke sensors ix) Infrared (IR) sensors x) Acceleration sensors xi) Gyroscopic
sensors xii) Humidity sensors xiii) Optical sensors-State the specifications of DHT11 temperature and
humidity sensor module For Arduino Raspberry Pi-State the specifications of BMP280 Pressure
Sensor Module High Precision Arduino-State the specifications of MQ-2 Smoke/Gas Sensor Module
for Arduino-State the specifications of HC-SR501 Adjust IrPyroelectric Infrared PIR Motion Sensor
Module for Arduino, ARM -State the function of the following actuators : i) Hydraulic Actuators ii)
Pneumatic Actuators iii) Electrical Actuators iv) Thermal/Magnetic actuators iv) Mechanical
actuators
4.Connectivity Technologies, computing hardware and Software components
State the use of Standard Wireless Access connecting technologies such as i) WiFi ii) 2G, 3G and
standard LTE, 5G in IoT-State the use of Private Long Range – LoRA based platform, Zigbee, and
SigFox. -State the use of Mobile IoT Technologies – LTE-M, NB-IoT, and EC-GSM-IoT-State the
specifications (coverage range, data rate) and IoT specific applications of the following connecting
technologies: i) WiFi ii) 2G iii) 3G iv) 4G v) 5G vi) LoRA based platform vii) Zigbee viii) SigFox-What is
NFC ( Near Field Communication) and List its applications-Differences between NFC and Bluetooth
and WiFi technologies-List the typical specifications and applications of i) WiFi ii) Bluetooth iii)
Zigbee iv) GSM v) GPS modules designed for Arduino, Raspberry Pi hardware platforms-Explain the
use of Computing Hardware (Arduino, Raspberry Pi) in IoT

5. IoT Case Studies

Explain the following IoT Case Studies with block diagrams -i) Home Automation-ii) Smart lighting -iii)
Home intrusion detection -iv) Air pollution monitoring system -v) Smart irrigation -vi) Healthcare

Reference Books:

1. Vijay Madisetti, ArshdeepBahga, Ïnternet of Things, “A Hands-on Approach”, University

Press
2. Dr. SRN Reddy, RachitThukral and Manasi Mishra, “Introduction to Internet of Things: A
practical Approach”, ETI Labs
3. Pethuru Raj and Anupama C. Raman, “The Internet of Things: Enabling Technologies,
Platforms, and Use Cases”, CRC Press
4. Jeeva Jose, “Internet of Things”, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi

162
 5. Adrian McEwen, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley
6. Raj Kamal, “Internet of Things: Architecture and Design”, McGraw Hill
7. CunoPfister, “Getting Started with the Internet of Things”, O Reilly Medi
8. Internet of Things Reference Architecture – Whitepaper – CISCO
9. IoT and Edge Computing for Architects: Implementing edge and IoT systems from sensors to
clouds with communication systems, analytics, and security, 2nd Edition – Perry Lea, Packt
Publishing Limited, ISBN-10: 189214805
10. IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases for Internet of Things,
David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome Henry, Cisco
Press, 2017
11. The Internet of Things – Key applications and Protocols, Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick,
Omar Elloumi and Wiley, 2012 (for Unit 2).
12. “From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things – Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence”, Jan Ho¨ ller, VlasiosTsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis, Karnouskos, Stefan
Avesand. David Boyle and Elsevier, 2014.
13. Architecting the Internet of Things, Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles and
Florian (Eds), Springer, 2011

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.5
Unit Test-II From 3.6 to 5.6

163
 EC-405, DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN THROUGH VERILOG HDL
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Digital Logic Design through Verilog
EC-405 05 75 20 80
HDL
No. of
Weight No. of
No. of Short COs
S No Unit Title age of Essay
Periods Answer Mapped
Marks Questions
Questions
Introduction to Verilog HDL,
1 Language constructs and 20 26 2 2 CO1
conventions
Gate level and Data flow
2 10 16 2 1 CO2
modelling.
3 Behavioural modeling 15 26 2 2 CO3
Modeling of combinational
4 15 26 2 2 CO4
and sequential logic circuits
5 System design concepts 15 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

To introduce the need of hardware description languages such as Verilog HDL and to
Use Verilog HDL constructs and conventions.
Course ToUnderstand the concepts of Gate level and Data flow modelling and
Objectives Behavioralmodeling
To Understand modelling of combinational and sequential logic circuits

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Apply the basics of Hardware Description Languages and use Verilog modules,
CO1 EC-405.1 instantiation process and hierarchical modeling concepts, Use Verilog HDL
constructs and conventions.
Develop Simple combinational logic circuits using Gate level and Data flow
CO2 EC-405.2
modeling.
Develop Simple combinational and sequential logic circuits using Behavioral
CO3 EC-405.3
modeling in Verilog HDL.
CO4 EC-405.4 Design and simulate sequential circuits using Verilog HDL.
Using concepts of Finite State machine and PLDs, FPGA, analyze system
CO5 EC-405.5
designs steps of UART and Traffic Light Controller

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-405.1 3 1 3 1
EC-405.2 3 2 1 2 3 1
EC-405.3 3 1 1 1 3 1
EC-405.4 3 3 2 1 2 3 2
EC-405.5 3 3 1 2 3 1 3 1 2
Average 3 1.8 1.25 1.5 1.8 3 1 1.5
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

164
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Introduction to Verilog HDL, Language constructs and conventions

1.1 Explain the steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design
1.2 Explain the importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design
1.3 Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL
1.4 List the features of Verilog HDL
1.5 Explain the difference between an instantiation and inference of a component.
1.6 Explain differences between modules and module instances in Verilog.
1.7 Explain four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a module
1.8 Identify the components of a Verilog module definition
1.9 Explain the port connection rules in a module instantiation
1.10 Explain about the hierarchical modelling/ Design methodologies
1.11 List the advantages of hierarchical modelling.
1.12 Explain the lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers, keywords, etc.
1.13 Explain different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time
Register data types
1.14 Explain data types like arrays, memories and strings.
1.15 Explain the difference between arrays and vectors with example
1.16 Explain defparam and localparam keywords
1.17 Explain about system tasks and compiler directives
1.18 Define expressions, operators and operands.
1.19 Explain all types of operators used in the Verilog HDL

2.0 Understand the concepts of Gate level and Data flow modelling.
2.1 Identify the logic gate primitives provided in Verilog
2.2 Explain the instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables for and/or and buf/not type
gates.
2.3 Explain Rise, fall and turn-off delays in the gate level modelling.
2.4 Explain the assignment statements in data flow modelling
2.5 Explain different types of delays used in the data flow level modelling
2.6 List the advantages of data flow modelling over gate level modelling.
2.7 Design simple logic combinational circuits like adders and subtractors, multiplexers and
demultiplexers, encoders and Decoders, comparators and ALU using Data Flow and Gate level
Modelling.

3.0 Understand the concepts of Behavioralmodeling

3.1 Explain structural procedures - initial and always statements.
3.2 Explain blocking and non blocking procedural assignments with examples
3.3 Explain timing controls like delay-based timing control and event-based timing control
3.4 Explain conditional statements.
3.5 Explain multiway branching – use case, caseX, and caseZ statements.
3.6 Explain the difference between conditional if statement and case statements.
3.7 Explain looping statements such as while, for, repeat, and forever.
3.8 Explain sequential and parallel blocks.
3.9 Explain about user defined primitives (UDP).
3.10 List the types of UDPs
3.11 Explain combinational UDPs with example
3.12 Explain sequential UDPs with example

165
4.0 Understand behaviouralmodelling of combinational and sequential logic circuits
4.1 Design combinational circuits like i) Multiplexers ii) Demultiplexers iii) Encoders iv) Decoders
4.2 Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with Asynchronous and Synchronous Clock and reset
4.3 Explain implementation of shift registers like SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc.
4.4 Design synchronous and asynchronous counters
4.5 Design a divide by 3 counters
4.6 Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc.
4.7 Design memories like RAM and ROM.
4.8 Compare RTL level and structural level modelling.
4.9 Explain the importance of stimulus block/test bench module.
4.10 Explain the structure of stimulus module.
4.11 Apply the stimulus modules for combinational and sequential circuits of Verilog designs

5.0 Understand the system design concepts

5.1 Explain the importance of Finite State Machines
5.2 Explain the Mealy and Moore types of State Machines.
5.3 Explain the design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL
5.4 Explain the design of Moore state machine using Verilog HDL
5.5 List various design tools which are useful in different stages of design.
5.6 List four important programmable logic devices.
5.7 Explain the architecture of PLAs.
5.8 Explain the architecture of PALs
5.9 Explain the architecture of CPLD.
5.10 Explain the architecture of FPGA.
5.11 Compare the programmable logic devices.
5.12 List any 3 applications of programmable logic devices.
5.13 Explain the design steps for simple systems like UART, Traffic Light controller using FPGA
board

COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction to Verilog HDL, Language constructs and conventions
Steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design-Importance of Hardware Description
Languages in VLSI design-Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL-Features of Verilog HDL-Difference
between an instantiation and inference of a component-Differences between modules and
module instances in Verilog-Levels of abstraction to represent the internals of the module-
Identify the components of a Verilog module definition-Port connection rules in module
instantiation- hierarchical modelling concepts, Lexical conventions like number specification,
Identifiers, Keywords, etc-Different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer,
real and time register data types, arrays, memories and strings-defparam and local Param
keywords-System tasks and compiler directives-Expressions, operators and operands-Types of
operators used in the Verilog HDL

2. Understand the concepts of Gate level and Data Flow modelling

Logic gates primitives provided in Verilog-Instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables
for and/or and buf/not types gates-Rise, fall and turn off delays in gate level design -
Assignment statements used in data flow modelling-Different types of delays used in the data

166
 flow level-compare gate level and behavioural Design simple logic circuits like adders,
subtractors using Dataflow and Gatelevelmodeling.
3. Understand the concepts of Behaviouralmodelling
Initial and Always statements-modelling-Blocking and Non-blocking procedural assignments
with examples-Timing controls like delay-based timing control and event-based timing
control-Conditional Statements-MultiwayBranching-Use of case, casex and casez statements-
Difference between conditional if statement and case statements-Looping statements such as
while, for, repeat and forever-Sequential and parallel blocks- User Defined Primitives (UDP)-
combinational and sequential UDPs
4. Understand behaviouralModelling of combinational and Sequential Logic circuits
Modelling of combinational and sequential circuits-Design combinational circuits like
multiplexers, decoders, encoders, comparators and ALU-Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with
asynchronous and synchronous clock and reset- Explain implementation of shift registers like
SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc-Design synchronous and asynchronous counters-Design a divide by
3 counter-Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc-Design memories like RAM and
ROM-.Importance of stimulus block-Structure of stimulus module-stimulus modules for
combinational and sequential circuits of Verilog designs.
5. Understand the System design concepts
Concept of Finite State Machines-Mealy and Moore types of state machines-Problems on
Mealy and Moore state machines-Design of Mealy state machine using Verilog HDL. Various
design tools which are useful in different stages of design-Important programmable logic
devices- Architecture of PLAs -Architecture of CPLD-Architecture of FPGAs-Comparison-
Applications.

Reference Books:

1. Digital systems design by Morris Mano

2. Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis by S. Palnitkar
3. Advanced Digital Design with VERILOG HDL by Michael D. Ciletti
4. Switching and finite automation theory by ZviKohavi
5. Digital state machine design by David J. Comes
6. Digital Systems by Ronald Tocci
7. Digital design principles and practice- John F Wakerly, PHI / Pearson education Asia 3rd Edn,2005
8. Design through Verilog HDL – T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, WSE, IEEE Press,
2004.
9. A Verilog Premier – J. Bhasker, BSP, 2003.
10. Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog – Stephen. Brown and ZvonkoVranesic, TMH, 2005.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.6
Unit Test-II From 3.7 to 5.13

167
 EC-406, ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-II LAB

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA

EC-406 Electronic Circuits-II Lab 03 45 40 60

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Wave Shaping Circuits 06 CO1
2 Operational Amplifier Circuits 21 CO2
3 Timers 06 CO3
4 PSpiceor equivalent software simulation 12 CO4
Total 45

1. To construct wave shaping circuits,

Course Objectives 2.To learn the practical importance of OP-AMP circuits.
3.To learn the practical importance of OP-AMP timers. .
4. To simulate wave shaping circuits, OP-AMP circuits, timers using simulation
software.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-406.1 Construct the wave shaping circuits and observe the waveforms.
CO2 EC-406.2 Construct the Circuits using OP-AMP and observe the waveforms.
CO3 EC-406.3 Construct Timer circuits using 555 IC timer.
Simulate wave shaping circuits, OP-AMP circuits, timers using P-spice or
CO4 EC-406.4
equivalent.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-406.1 3 2 3 3
EC-406.2 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2
EC-406.3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2
EC-406.4 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2
Average 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2

3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

168
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Wave shaping circuits

1. Construct different Positive and negative clipper circuits and obtain output waveforms with
sinusoidal input
2. Realize a Clamper circuit and observe the input and output waveforms on CRO

II. Operational Amplifier Circuits

3. Implement and test 741 Op-Amp as a) inverting amplifier, b) non-Inverting amplifier and
c) Voltage follower (Buffer) – observe wave forms
4. Implement and test 741 Operation amplifier as
a) summer b) Differentiator c) Integrator
5. Implement Monostable using Op-Amp and observe output waveform on CRO
6. Implement A stablemultivibrator using Op-Amp and observe output waveform on CRO
7. Construct multi tone bell using IC 741 OP-AMP and observe the changes in the tone and the
output of bell
8. Implement Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp and observe output waveform on CRO
9. Implement RC-phase shift oscillator Circuit using Op-Amp and observe output waveform on
CRO
10. Implement Wien bridge oscillator Circuit using Op-Amp and observe Output waveform on CRO

III. 555Timer
11. Construct A stable multi vibrator using 555 IC and observe output waveform on CRO
12. Construct LED sequencer using IC 555 and observe the sequence of running LEDs (Use8LEDs)
IV. PSpice or equivalent software simulation

13. Simulate Double sided clipper using diodes

14. Simulate a) Summer b) Differentiator c) Integrator and c) Scale changer using Op-Amp
15. Simulate Monostablemultivibrator using Op-Amp
16. Simulate A stablemultivibrator using 555 IC

169
 EC-407, MICROCONTROLLERS AND INTERFACING LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Microcontrollers and
EC-407 03 45 40 60
Interfacing Lab

S.No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

Familiarization with Keil software and
1 03 CO1
Microcontroller Kit
Basic programming using Microcontroller
2 15 CO2
kit/Keil
Interfacing I/O devices with 8051 using
3 18 CO3
Embedded C
Application development using
4 06 CO4
Proteus/equivalent software
5 Dumping/Burning into Microcontroller chip 03 CO4
Total 45

1. To familiarize with 8051 Microcontroller kit and Keil compiler

Course 2. To understand the programming and interfacing concepts of 8051
Objectives Microcontroller
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of programming and
interfacing of 8051 Microcontroller chip
,

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-407.1 Describe the usage of 8051 Microcontroller kit and Keil Compiler
CO2 EC-407.2 Apply Instruction set of 8051 Microcontroller in AL programming
CO3 EC-407.3 Apply Instruction set of 8051 Microcontroller for interfacing of I/O devices
Simulate Interfacing circuits using Proteus and learn the burning of firmware
CO4 EC-407.4
into Microcontroller chip
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-407.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-407.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-407.3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
EC-407.4 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

170
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Familiarization with Microcontroller Kit & Simulators

1. Familiarize with 8051 Microcontroller Kit
2. Familiarize with 8051 simulator KEIL (or equivalent software)
II. Basic programming using Microcontroller kit/Keil
3. Write an ALP to perform Block move - 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 to 0X40-0X49
4. Write an ALP to perform Block exchange – 10bytes of data between 0X30-0X39 to 0X40-
0X49
5. Write an ALP to perform: Addition,subtraction,division and multiplication of two8-bit
numbers
6. Write an ALP to perform addition of two16-bit numbers
7. Write an ALP to perform subtraction of two16-bit numbers
8. Write an ALP to the find Smallest/Largest number in 10bytes of data stored from 0X30 to
0X39 and store the result in the next location i.e., 0X3A
9. Write an ALP to find the 2’s complement of given 8-bit number
III. To practice Interfacing Techniques using Embedded C
10. Write a program to make an LED connected to port pin P1.5, light up for specific time on
pressing a switch connected to port pin P2.3
11. Write a Program to make an LED connected to pinP1.7 to blink at a specific rate
12. Interface a 7segment LED display with 8051 microcontroller and write a program to display
a given decimal digit
13. Interface a small DC motor with 8051 and write a program to rotate the motor in
clockwise/anti clockwise direction
IV. Application development using proteus/equivalent software
14. Familiarization of firmware-based application with proteus/equivalent software
15. Perform experiments given in 10 and 11 above using proteus
V. Dumping/Burning into Microcontroller
16. Perform burning/loading of .HEX file of experiments given in 10and 11 above into flash
memory for 89C51 and test it in development kit.

171
 EC-408, COMMUNICATION SKILLS
No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Course Code Course Title
Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
Communication
EC-408 3 45 40 60
Skills

- to communicate effectively in diverse academic, professional and everyday

situations
Course
- exhibit appropriate body language and etiquette at workplace
Objectives
- be employable through preparing appropriate job applications and attend
interviews confidently with all necessary skills

CO No.
CO1 Listen and comprehend the listening inputs related to different genres effectively
CO2 Communicate effectively in interpersonal interactions, interviews, group
discussions and presentations
CO3 Acquire employability skills: job hunting, resume writing, attending interviews
CO4 Practise appropriate body language and professional etiquette
Course Delivery: Text book: “English Communication Skills”
by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

Sl No Unit Teaching
Hours
1 Listening Skills 6
2 Workplace Etiquette 3
3 Introducing Oneself 3
4 Short presentation (JAM) 6
5 Group Discussion 6
6 Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3
7 Interview Skills 9
8 Presentation Skills 9
Total 45

Course Content:
UNIT I:Listening Skills 6 periods
Pre – While- Post-listening activities- Listening to audio content ( dialogues/ speech/ narrations) -
answering the questions and fill in the blanks- vocabulary
UNIT 2: Workplace Etiquette 3 periods
Basics of Etiquette- politeness/ courtesy, good manners- features of work place etiquette-
adaptability, positive attitude, body language.
UNIT 3: Introducing Oneself 3 periods
Speak about oneself - introduce oneself to a gathering/ formal & informal situations- Know about
others- filling in the grid- introducing oneself in interviews

172
UNIT 4: Short Presentation 6 periods
Dos and Don’ts in short presentation- speak for a minute without repetition, deviation & hesitation -
the techniques to speak fluently – defining and describing objects, people, phenomena, events.-
speaking on randomly chosen topics.
UNIT 5: Group Discussion 6 periods
Fundamentals of Group Discussion- Dos and Don’ts- filling the Grid- possible list of topics- practice
sessions- sample videos-Group activity
UNIT 6: Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3 periods
Pre activity: answer the questions- jotting down biographical information- sample resumes- tips, Dos
and Don’ts- model resumes- practice exercises on Resume writing
UNIT 7: Interview Skills 9 periods
Pre –while-post activities: - things to do at three stages – respond to notifications- know the
information about the organisation-practice FAQs - preparation of good/ suitable C V, Body
language, tips for success in interviews, model / mock interviews.
UNIT 8: Presentation Skills 9 periods
Preparatory work: observe pictures and answer questions- different kinds of presentations- PPTs,
Flash cards, Posters, Charts. - tips to prepare aids, slide show, model PPTs, - checklist on pre, while
and post presentations.

Mapping Course Outcomes with Programme Outcomes:

PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CO POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4

Principles, can’t be directly mapped to English
Communication Skills

Unit wise Mapping of CO –PO

CO Course Outcome COs / Unit POs Cognitive levels as per
Mapped mapping Bloom’s Taxonomy
R/U/A/An
( Remembering /
Understanding /
Applying/ Analyising)

CO 1 Listen and comprehend listening 6,7 R/U/A

inputs related to different genres Unit 1
effectively
CO2 Communicate effectively in Units 6,7 R/U/A/An
interpersonal interactions, interviews, 3,4,5,7,8
group discussions and presentations
CO3 Acquire employability skills: job 6,7 R/U/A/An
hunting, resume writing, attending Units
interviews 6,7
CO4 Practise appropriate body language Units 6,7 R/U/A
and professional etiquette 2, 3, 4,5,7,8
-0o0-

173
 EC-409, IOT AND SENSORS LAB
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
EC-409 IoTand Sensors Lab 03 45 40 60

S. No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

I. Familiarization with Esp8266
1 Board/Ardino/Raspberry PI (or equivalent 03 CO1
Board)
II. Basic Interfacing programming using
2 30 CO2
Esp8266 and BlynkIoT
A Application development using Esp8266 and
3 12 CO3
B BlynkIoT
Total 45

1. To Familiarization with Esp8266 Board (or equivalent Board) and BlynkIoT

Course 2. To interface sensors using Esp8266 and BlynkIoT
Objectives
3. To learn the practical importance and Application development using Esp8266
and BlynkIoT

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 17. Describe the usage of Esp8266 and BlynkIoT Platform
EC-409.1

CO2 18. Apply Interfacing using Esp8266 and BlynkIoT

EC-409.2

CO3 EC-409.3 Apply Application development using Esp8266 and BlynkIoT

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-409.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-409.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-409.3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

174
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Familiarization with Esp8266 Board (or equivalent Board)

1. Familiarize with Esp8266 Board (NodeMCU)

2. Familiarize with ARDUINO IDE (or equivalent software)

3. Familiarize with BlynkIoT (or equivalent software)

II. Basic Interfacing programming using Esp8266 and BlynkIoT

4. Interface LED with Esp8266 and control it through mobile using BlynkIoT app

5. Interface DHT11 sensor with Esp8266 and display temperature in BlynkIoT app

6. Interface DHT11 sensor with Esp8266 and display humidity in BlynkIoT app

7. Interface Acload with Esp8266 and control it through BlynkIoT app

8. Interface Ultrasonic sensor with Esp8266 to measure the distance from the target and display it

in BlynkIoT app

9. Interface soil moisture sensor with Esp8266 to measure the percentage of soil moisture and

display it in BlynkIoT app

10. Interface servo motor with Esp8266 and rotate it (0-180o).

III. Application development using Esp8266 and BlynkIoT

11. Interface temperature sensor with Esp8266 and turn on the fan when temperature exceeds

the threshold level, and observe the status of temperature and fan through IoT.

12. Build a Webserver on Esp8266 to control LED

13. Build any small prototype by using any three sensors mentioned above and BlynkIoT.

0o0-

175
 EC-410, DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN THROUGH VERILOG HDL LAB
Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Course Title
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
Digital Logic Design
EC-410 through Verilog HDL 3 45 40 60
Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

Familiarization with Xilinx ISE/Vivado (or)

1 06 CO1
similar software
2 Implementing Basic logic gates 9 CO2

3 Implementing Combinational Circuits 9 CO3

Implementing Sequential Circuits such as
4 21 CO4
Flipflops, Registers & counters
Total 45

1. To familiarize with withXilinx ISE/Vivado (or) similar software

Course
2. To Implement Basic logic gates, Combinational Circuits
Objectives
3. To implement Sequential Circuits such as Flipflops, Registers & counters

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-410.1 Work with Xilinx ISE/Vivado (or) similar software
CO2 EC-410.2 Implement Basic logic gates
CO3 EC-410.3 Implement Combinational Circuits
CO4 EC-410.4 Implement Sequential Circuits such as Flipflops, Registers & counters

176
Course Contents:
Using Xilinx ISE/Vivado (or) similar software

I. Implementing Basic logic gates

1. Implement Basic Logic Gates
2. Implement Adders (Half adder and Full Adder)
3. Implement Subtractors (Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor)
II. Combinational Circuits
4. Implement 4-bit Parallel Adder
5. Implement Multiplexers (2:1, 4:1 and 8:1 MUX)
6. Implement Demultiplexers (1:2, 1:4 and 1:8 DEMUX)
7. Implement Decoders (1:2, 2:4 and 3:8 Decoder)
8. Implement Encoders (2:1, 4:2 and 8:3 encoder)
9. Implement Comparator (2-bit and 4-bit)
10. Implement ALU
III. Sequential Circuits
11. Implement Flip Flops (JK- Flip Flop and SR-Flip flop)
12. Implement Flip Flops (D- Flip Flop and T-Flip flop)
IV. Registers & counters
13. Implement Shift Registers (SISO, SIPO)
14. Implement Shift Registers (PISO, PIPO)
15. Implement Counter (BCD and Decimal Counters)
-0o0-

177
V SEMESTER

178
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
V SEMESTER

Instruction
Scheme of Examination
periods / week Total
Subject Name of the
Periods
Code Subject End Total
Prac / Sem Duration Sessional
Theory Exam
tical (hours) Marks Marks
Marks

Industrial
EC-501 Management and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Entrepreneurship
EC-502 Embedded Systems 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Optical & Mobile
EC-503 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Communications
Industrial
EC-504 Electronics and 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Automation
Data
Communication
EC-505 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
and Computer
Networks
Embedded Systems
EC-506 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
Industrial
EC-507 Electronics and - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Automation Lab
EC-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Advanced
Communication
EC-509 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
and Networking
Lab
EC-510 Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Activities 3 45 - - - -
TOTAL 24 18 630 - 300 700 1000
Note: EC-508 is common with all branches

179
 EC-501, INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Industrial Management and
EC-501 04 60 20 80
Entrepreneurship

No. of Weighta No. of Short No. of COs

S.No Unit Title period ge of Answer Essay mappe
s Marks Questions Questions d
Basics of Industrial
Management, Organisation
1 10 26 2 2 CO1
structure & Organisational
behaviour
Electronic Product design and
2 13 26 2 2 CO2
Development stages
Electronic Product testing&
3 15 26 2 2 CO3
documentation
Entrepreneurship
4 12 16 2 1 CO4
Development.
5 Industrial Safety 10 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 60 110 30 80

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiarise the concepts of management, ownership styles, organisation
structures and Industrial safety.
COURSE 2. To get Exposure to organisational behavioural concepts, basics of Electronic
OBJECTIVES Product design, Development, testing and documentation stages in electronic
industries.
3. To understand the concept Entrepreneurship Development in industries.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
Explain the basics of management, Organisation structure & Organizational
CO1 EC-501.1
behaviour as applied to industry
CO2 EC-501.2 Explain Product Design and Development Stages applied to electronic industries
CO3 EC-501.3 Analyse the testing standardisation for electronic products.
Describe the role of entrepreneur in economic development and in
CO4 EC-501.4
improving the quality of life
CO5 EC-501.5 Explain about Industrial Safety

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-501.1 1 1
EC-501.2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
EC-501.3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
EC-501.4 1 1 1 3
EC-501.5 3 2 2 2 0 2 2
Average 2.20 3.00 3.00 2.50 1.75 1.33 2.00 1.33 2.25
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

180
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Basics of Industrial Management, Organization Structure & organizational behaviour

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.

1.2 State the need for management.
1.3 State the functions of Management.
1.4 Explain the principles of scientific management.
1.5 Differentiate: i) management and administration.
ii) Supervisory, middle and top-level management
1.6 Explain the line, staff and Functional organization structures.
1.7 State motivation theories.
1.8 Explain Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs.
1.9 List out different leadership models.
1.10 Explain the trait theory of leadership and behavioural theory of Leadership
1.11 Explain the process of recruitment and selection.
1.12 Explain different types of business ownerships and compare them
1.13 Define social responsibilities and Corporate social responsibility

2. Electronic Product design and Development stages

2.1 Explain the concept of product development with a block diagram.

2.2 Give classification of Electronic Products.
2.3 Explain the Techno Commercial Feasibility of a product.
2.4 Explain customer requirements
2.5 Explain R&D prototype Assessment of reliability.
2.6 Explain factors for reliability of equipment.
2.7 Explain quality considerations.
2.8 List reasons for failure of an electronic product
2.9 Explain Bath tub curve
2.10 Explain Product packaging and storage
2.11 Estimate power supply requirements of an electronic product
2.12 List two types of power supply protection devices
2.13 Define noise reduction.
2.14 Explain grounding, shielding and guarding techniques
2.15 Explain Thermal management

3. Electronic Product testing & documentation

3.1 Explain the importance of product testing and Environmental testing

3.2 Explain Dry heat testing, Vibration testing, random testing and Bump testing
3.3 Explain Temperature extreme testing forlinear and step stress profiles
3.4 Explain Vibration & temperature cycling
3.5 Explain EMI and EMC compliance testing standardization
3.6 Explain UL and CE Certification of industrial electronic products.
3.7 Explain the importance of documentation
3.8 List types of documentation
3.9 Explain types of documents

181
 3.10 List rules for preparation of effective document
3.11 Explain PCB documentation
3.12 Explain Assembly and fabrication related documentation for Laminate grade
3.13 Explain the preparation a manual document
3.14 Explain the details of service manual
3.15 Explain test report/manuals
3.16 Explain product documentation, Bill of materials, Production test specifications
4. Entrepreneurship Development.
4.1 Define the word entrepreneur.
4.2 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur.
4.3 Determine the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small Scale Industries.
4.4 Describe the details of self-employment schemes.
4.5 List the financial assistance programmes.
4.6 List out the organisations that help an entrepreneur
4.7 Explain the use of EDP Programmes
4.8 Understand the concept of make in India, zero defect and zero effect
4.9 Understand the importance for start ups
4.10 Explain the conduct of demand surveys
4.11 Explain the conduct of a market survey
4.12 Evaluate Economic and Technical factors.
4.13 What is the feasibility study in project management
4.14 What are the advantages of feasibility study
4.15 Prepare feasibility report study
5. Industrial Safety
5.1 Explain the importance of safety in the industry.
5.2 Explain the principles of 5S safety system.
5.3 Explain the major hazards which may arise from the use of electrical equipment
5.4 Explain the precautions to be taken to prevent accidents while using Machines
5.5 Explain method of first aid treatment for someone suffering from electric shock.
5.6 State general electrical safety rules
5.7 Explain the safety signs and colours
5.8 Show various safety symbols and explain their meaning.
5.9 Explain the causes of Fire and fire accidents in industry.
5.10 Explain Fire prevention measures.
5.11 List four types of Portable fire extinguishers
5.12 Explain the choice of above extinguishers.
5.13 Explain the First aid treatment in the case of burns
COURSE CONTENT
1. Basics of Industrial Management, Organisation Structure & organisational behaviour
Introduction: Industry, Commerce and Business; Definition of management; Functions of
management - Principles of scientific management: –Administration and management;- levels of
management; Organisation structure- behaviour of individual in an organisation-delegation an
decentralisation- effective organisation- Motivational Theories; -Leadership Models; -decision
making-Human resources requirement- process of recruitment, selection - Forms of Business
ownerships - Social responsibility and Corporate Social responsibility

182
2. Electronic Product design and Development stages:
Introduction, Explain the Techno Commercial Feasibility of specifications, Explain R&D prototype
Assessment of reliability, estimating power supply requirements, Power supply protection devices,
Noise reduction, Grounding, Shielding and guarding techniques, Thermal management,
3. Electronic Product testing and Documentation:
Introduction to product testing, Environmental testing: Dry heat, Vibration temperature cycling,
Bump and Humidity tests as specified in IS standards, EMI EMC compliance testing standardization,
UL and CE Certification of industrial electronic products-PCB documentation, Assembly and
fabrication related documentation Laminate grade, product documentation User manual service
maintenance manual Bill of materials Production test specifications
4. Entrepreneurship Development.
Definition of Entrepreneur; Role of Entrepreneur; Concept of Make in India, ZERO defect, Zero
Effect, Concept of Start-up Company, Entrepreneurial Development: Role of SSI, MSME, DICs,
Entrepreneurial development schemes; Institutional support, financial assistance programmes;
Market survey and Demand survey; Preparation of Feasibility study reports
5. Industrial Safety
Importance of safety in the industry-the principles of 5S safety system-the major hazards which may
arise from the use of electrical equipment-precautions to be taken to prevent accidents while using
Machines - method of first aid treatment for someone suffering from electric shock- general
electrical safety rules-the safety signs and colours-various safety symbols and explain their meaning-
causes of Fire and fire accidents in industry-Fire prevention measures-types of Portable fire
extinguisher-choice of above extinguishers-the First aid treatment in the case of burns

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. O.P Khanna, Industrial Engineering and Management
2. Buffa, Production Management
3. Banga& Sharma, Engineering Economics and Management Science
4. Flippo, Personnel Management
5. S.N. Chary, Production and Operations Management
6. Converging_Technologies_for_Smart_Environments_and_Integrated_Ecosystems_IERC_Bo
ok_Open_Access_2013 pages-54-76
7. Electronic Product Design, R.G. Kaduskar, V.B.Baru, Wiley India
8. Electronic testing and fault diagnosis –G.C. Loveday (Ah wheeler Publication, India)

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8
Unit Test-II From 3.9 to 5.13

183
 EC-502, EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Course No of Total no Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
EC-502 Embedded Systems 05 75 20 80
No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Introduction to
1 15 16 2 1 CO1
Embedded systems
Communication
2 Standards and Real Time 15 26 2 2 CO2
Operating System
ARM Cortex M3
3 15 26 2 2 CO3
Architecture
ARM - Instruction set and
4 15 26 2 2 CO4
programming
5 ARM Interfacing 15 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

To introduce Embedded systems and to explain Communication Standards and

Course Real Time Operating System
Objectives To understand ARM Cortex M3 Architecture, Memory and Peripherals
To learn ARM - Instruction set and programming

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-502.1 Know about Embedded systems and its importance.
CO2 EC-502.2 Know about Communication Standards and Real Time Operating System
CO3 EC-502.3 Understand ARM Cortex M3 Architecture
CO4 EC-502.4 Learn Memory and Peripherals
CO5 EC-502.5 Learn ARM - Instruction set and programming
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-502.1 3 3
EC-502.2 3 3 3
EC-502.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-502.4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
EC-502.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 3 2.5 3 3 3
3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped

184
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0. INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

1.1. Define Embedded System
1.2. Compare Embedded System and General Computing System
1.3. List five Application areas of Embedded System
1.4. Draw and explain the general block diagram of an embedded system
1.5. Explain Harvard and Von-Neumann architecture.
1.6. State the features of CISC architecture
1.7. State the features of RISC architecture
1.8. Compare the features of RISC and CISC architectures
1.9. Classify embedded systems
1.10. Explain Core of the Embedded System
1.11. Explain Memory management in Embedded System
1.12. Explain Embedded Firmware

2.0 COMMUNICATION STADARDS AND REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

2.1 Explain about SPI, I2C, UART communication communication protocols

2.2 State the need of Operating system.
2.3 Compare general OS and RTOS
2.4 List three Types of RTOS
2.5 List the features of RTOS
2.6 Explain Real Time Operating System
2.7 List the characteristics of RTOS
2.8 Explain Tasks, Process and Threads
2.9 Explain task management and scheduling
2.10 Explain resource allocation and interrupt handling
2.11 Define Multi Processing and Multi-Tasking

3.0 ARM CORTEX M3 ARCHITECTURE

3.1.List ARM cortex families.

3.2.Compare different types of ARM cortex series.
3.3.List the features of ARM cortex M3
3.4.List the applications of ARM cortex M3
3.5.Draw and explain the architecture of ARM cortex M3
3.6.List the general purpose and special purpose registers of ARM cortex M3
3.7.Explain ARM cortex M3 processor operating modes with switching diagrams
3.8.List interrupts in ARM cortex M3
3.9.Explain about Interrupt Vector controller of ARM cortex M3
3.10. List the differences between Exceptions and Interrupts
3.11. Explain about handling of exceptions and interrupts of ARM cortex M3
3.12. Define interrupts tail chaining in ARM
3.13. Explain about system stack architecture of ARM cortex M3
3.14. Explain about reset sequence in ARM cortex M3

185
 3.15. Explain about pipeline architecture and data path of ARM cortex M3
3.16. Define Memory endianness in ARM cortex M3
3.17. Define bit banding in ARM cortex processor
3.18. Explain about memory address mapping of ARM cortex M3
4.0 ARM - INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING

4.1. Draw the generalized instruction format of ARM cortex M3

4.2. Classify the instruction set of ARM cortex M3
4.3. Explain the data processing instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.4. Explain the memory access instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.5. Explain the multiply and divide instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.6. Explain the bit field instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.7. Explain the branch and control instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.8. Explain the Saturating instructions of ARM cortex M3
4.9. Write a program to illustrate the application of data processing instructions
4.10. Write a program to perform addition, subtraction, multiplication and division
4.11. Write a program to perform branch control operations

5.0 ARM INTERFACING

5.1 Explain about GPIO interfacing of ARM cortex M3

5.2 Explain about ADC and DAC interfacing and their usage and applications (Voltage
measurement, sinewave generation).
5.3 Explain about ARM peripherals: i) Timer ii) Watchdog timer iii) Sys Tick iv) PWMv)Internal
RTC
5.4 Explain about Interfacing LEDs and switches of ARM cortex M3
5.5 Explain about interfacing seven segment display of ARM cortex M3
5.6 Explain about keypad interfacing of ARM cortex M3
5.7 Explain about LCD interfacing of ARM cortex M3

COURSE CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND RTOS

Introduction, embedded system vs General computing system, classification and applications,

Typical Embedded System-memory management, Firmware,

2. COMMUNICATION STADARDS AND REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM

Explain about SPI, I2C, UART communication communication protocols- Operating System Basics -
Compare general OS and RTOS-Explain Real Time Operating System -List the characteristics of RTOS-
Explain Tasks, Process and Threads -Explain task management and scheduling -Explain resource
allocation and interrupt handling-Define Multi Processing and Multi-Tasking

186
3. ARM CORTEX M3 ARCHITECTURE

List ARM cortex families-Compare different types of ARM cortex series- Features and applications of
ARM cortex M3- architecture of ARM cortex M3- general purpose and special purpose registers of
ARM cortex M3- ARM cortex M3 processor operating modes with switching diagrams- interrupts in
ARM cortex M3-Interrupt Vector controller of ARM cortex M3-handling of exceptions and interrupts
of ARM cortex M3-Define interrupts tail chaining in ARM-system stack architecture of ARM cortex
M3-Explain about reset sequence in ARM cortex M3-Explain about pipeline architecture and data
path of ARM cortex M3-Define Memory endianness in ARM cortex M3 -Define bit banding in ARM
cortex processor -Explain about memory address mapping of ARM cortex M3

4. ARM - INSTRUCTION SET AND PROGRAMMING

ARM Instruction set basics, data processing instructions, memory access instructions, Multiply and
divide instructions, bit field instructions, branch and control instructions. ARM programming

5. ARM INTERFACING
I/O interfacing – Fundamentals, GPIO interfacing-Explain about ADC and DAC interfacing and their
usage and applications (Voltage measurement, sinewave generation)-Explain about ARM
peripherals: i) Timer ii) Watchdog timer iii) Sys Tick iv) PWM v) Internal RTC Interfacing LEDs and
switches, interfacing seven segment display, keypad interfacing and LCD interfacing.
Reference Books:

1. Joseph Yiu,” The Definitive Guide to ARM Cortex-M3 and Cortex-M4 Processors”, Elsevier,
3rd Edition, 2014.
2. Trevor Martin, “The Designer’s Guide to the Cortex-M Processor Family”, 2th edition,
Elsevier 2016.
3. Muhammad Tahir and KashifJaved, “ARM Microprocessor Systems - Cortex-M Architecture,
Programming, and Interfacing”, CRC Press, 2017.
4. Joseph Yiu,” The Definitive Guide to ARM Cortex” Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, Elsevier 2010.
5. Jonathan W. Valvano, “Embedded Systems: Real-Time Interfacing to Arm Cortex-M
Microcontrollers”, Volume-2, 4th edition, 2014.
6. James A. Langbridge, “Professional Embedded Arm Development”, John Wiley & Sons, 2014
7. Cortex -M3 Technical Reference Manual
8. Dr. Alexander G. Dean, “Embedded Systems Fundamentals with Arm Cortex-M based
Microcontrollers: A Practical Approach in English”, Published by Arm Education Media
9. Andrew Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer’s Guide”, Elsevier
India, 1st Edition.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8
Unit Test-II From 3.9 to 5.7

187
 EC-503, OPTICAL &MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Optical & Mobile
EC-503 05 75 20 80
Communications

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Overview of Fibre Optic
1 10 16 2 1 CO1
Communication
Fibre Optic components
2 15 21 2 1.5 CO2
and Devices
Cellular system design
3 12 26 2 2 CO3
fundamentals
Digital Cellular Mobile
4 System and Multiplexing 20 26 2 2 CO4
Techniques
1.0 Advanced Concepts in
5 Digital Cellular Mobile 18 21 2 1.5 CO5
system
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To familiarize the concepts of Fiber optic, Telephony and Cellular communication

systems.
Course 2. To equip with various issues related to Fiber optic, Telephony and Cellular
Objectives communication systems.
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of Fiber optic, Telephony and
Cellular communication systems.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-503.1 Describe fiber optic communication techniques.
CO2 EC-503.2 Describe fiber optic components and devices
CO3 EC-503.3 Analyse the cellular system design
CO4 EC-503.4 Interpret Digital cellular systems and multiplexing Techniques
CO5 EC-503.5 Describe the Advanced Digital cellular mobile systems

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-503.1 3 3 1 2 3 2
EC-503.2 3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2
EC-503.3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2
EC-503.4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2
EC-503.5 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
Average 3 3 2.2 2 2.6 2.25 3 2.25 2
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

188
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Over View of Fibre Optic Communication

1.1 State the advantages of light wave communication system over EM wave systems.
1.2 Explain the structure of optical fibre
1.3 Classify optical fibres based on refractive index profile
1.4 List the types of fibres based on core diameter
1.5 Define Single mode fibre (SMF) and multimode fibre (MMF)
1.6 Define Snell’s law in optics
1.7 Explain light wave propagation in OFC
1.8 Define acceptance angle and Cone of acceptance.
1.9 Define numerical aperture (NA)
1.10 Derive the expression for NA in terms of refractive indices of core and cladding

2.0 Fibre Optic Components and Devices

2.1 List various fibre optic components
2.2 State the need of splicing in optical fibres
2.3 State the need for optical coupler/splitter
2.4 List two types of sources used in OFC
2.5 List the salient features of an optical source
2.6 List two types of detectors used in OFC
2.7 List the salient features of an optical detector
2.8 State the principle of LASER
2.9 Explain the construction and working of LASER source (Fabry Perot Resonator Cavity)
2.10 Explain the construction and working of Avalench Photo Diode (Reach Through APD)
2.11 Draw the block diagram of fibre optic communication system and explain each block
2.12 Explain intrinsic and extrinsic losses in optical fibres
2.13 Classify different types of dispersion losses occur in optical fibres.
2.14 State the limitations of TDM in fiber optic communications
2.15 State the need for WDM in fibre optic communication
2.16 Draw the block diagram of WDM system and explain
2.17 Draw the block diagram of DWDM system and explain

3.0 Cellular system design fundamentals

3.1 List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.
3.2 Explain the evolution of cellular mobile communication system.
3.3 Draw the block diagram of a basic cellular system
3.4 Define the terms mobile station and base station
3.5 State the functions of Mobile Switching Centre (MSC)
3.6 Define forward and reverse channels in mobile communication
3.7 Define voice and control channels in mobile communication
3.8 Explain the process of call progress in a cellular telephone system
3.9 State the need for hexagonal cell site
3.10 Explain the concept of Frequency reuse
3.11 Define the terms cell and cluster related to Mobile communications
3.12 Define Co-Channel Reuse ratio and obtain its relation with cluster size.
3.13 Explain the capacity of a cellular system and derive its expression.
3.14 Define Hand-off in mobile communication

189
3.15 Explain the radio subsystem of analog cellular system (AMPS)
3.16 List the drawbacks of analog cellular system.

4.0 Digital Cellular Mobile System and Multiple access Techniques

4.1 List the features of digital cellular system.
4.2 Explain the frequency spectrum of Global system for mobile communication (GSM) system
4.3 Explain the architecture of GSM.
4.4 List various interfaces in GSM architecture
4.5 List the service and security aspects of GSM.
4.6 Explain the authentication and encryption process used in GSM security.
4.7 List the advantages of GSM
4.8 List the draw backs of GSM system.
4.9 State the need for multiple access techniques
4.10 List the three types of multiple access techniques.
4.11 List the features of FDMA and TDMA
4.12 Explain the frame structure of a TDMA
4.13 Explain the concept of spread spectrum technique
4.14 Explain CDMA and list its features
4.15 Compare FDMA, TDMA and CDMA
4.16 Explain the concept of OFDM

5.0 Advanced Concepts in Digital Cellular Mobile system

5.1 List the features of GPRS and EDGE systems
5.2 Compare the features of GSM, GPRS and EDGE systems
5.3 List the salient features of 3G system
5.4 List the advantages of 3G over earlier versions
5.5 Explain the architecture of 3G Cellular System (UMTS)
5.6 Explain briefly about soft-handoff and power control in CDMA
5.7 Distinguish between hard-off and soft-hand-off.
5.8 List the salient features of 4G Cellular system
5.9 Explain the VoLTE architecture of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
5.10 List different IMS applications
5.11 List the salient features of 5G Cellular System
5.12 Explain the architecture of 5G Cellular system
5.13 Explain about 5G NR technology
5.14 List the applications of 5G technology

COURSE CONTENTS:

1. Overview of Fibre Optic Communication

Advantages of Light wave communication system over EM wave systems- structure of optical fibre-
Classification of optical fibres based on refractive index profile- types of fibres based on core
diameter - Single mode(SMF) and Multimode fibre (MMF)-Snell’s law in optics -light wave
propagation in OFC-acceptance angle and Cone of acceptance-numerical aperture (NA)-intrinsic and
extrinsic losses-Classification of different types of dispersion losses occur in optical fibres- WDM in
fibre optic communication- block diagram of WDM system

190
2.Fibre Optic Components and Devices
List of fibre optic components- function of splice in optical fibres-need for optical coupler/splitter-
sources used in OFC- two types of detectors used in OFC- feature of an optical detector-principle of
LASER-construction and working of LASER source- construction and working of APD- block diagram
of fibre optic communication system and explain each block.

3. Cellular system design fundamentals

Conventional mobile phone system-Evolution of cellular mobile communication system- mobile
station and base station-functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC)- voice and control channels in
mobile communication-Block diagram of a basic cellular system- call progress in a cellular telephone
system- hexagonal cell site- Frequency reuse-Cell and cluster- Cluster size and co-channel reuse ratio
- capacity of a cellular system-Hand-off in mobile communication-drawbacks of analog cellular
system

4. Digital Cellular mobile system and Multiplexing Techniques

-need for multiple access techniques-three types of multiple access techniques TDMA, FDMA and
CDMA -Compare FDMA, TDMA and CDMA-OFDM-Features of digital cellular system- Global system
for mobile communication (GSM) with block diagram-interfaces in GSM architecture-service and
security aspects of GSM-advantages of GSM-draw backs of GSM system

5. Advanced Digital Cellular mobile system

GPRS and EDGE-salient features of 3G system-advantages of 3G over earlier versions-architecture of
3G cellular system – soft hand-off – power control in CDMA -basic concepts of 4G aspects –VoLTE
architecture of IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) - IMS applications-Salient features of 5G-architecture
of 5G

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Raj Pandya, Mobile and Personal communication systems and services, PHI
2. Theodore S. Rappaport, PEARSON Wireless Communications-Principles and practice
3. Willium C. Y. Lee Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and
Digital systems, McGrawHill
4. Jochen Schiller Mobile Communications, PEARSON
5. GerdKeise,OpticalFiberCommunications
6. Anuradha De Optical fiber and Laser- Principles and applications, New Agepublications
7. John M. Senior Optical fiber communications-Principles and practice, Pearson Publications
8. S.C.Gupta, 2004 Optical Fiber Communications and Its Applications,PHI.

‘Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8
Unit Test-II From 3.9 to 5.12

191
 EC-504, INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND AUTOMATION

No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course Code Course title
periods/week periods for FA for SA
Industrial Electronics and
EC-504 05 75 20 80
Automation

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
1 Power Electronic Devices 20 26 2 2 CO1
2 Inverters, SMPS, UPS &
15 26 2 2 CO2
Battery Management
3 Transducers and
12 16 2 1 CO3
Ultrasonics
4 Control systems 13 16 2 1 CO4
5 PLCs and SCADA 15 26 2 2 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To learn the principles and working of power electronic devices, opto electronic
Course devices, Transducers,SMPS,UPS,PLC etc..
Objectives 2. To analyze the Industrial heating, and Control systems
3. To learn the practical importance Industrial electronic devices and circuits.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-504.1 Describe Various Power Electronic Devices like SCR, DIAC, TRIAC etc.
Understand the principle of working of Inverters, SMPS, UPS and Battery
CO2 EC-504.2
Management
CO3 EC-504.3 Understand and use different Transducers and Ultrasonics
CO4 EC-504.4 Understand the concepts of control systems
CO5 EC-504.5 Use the concepts of PLC& SCADA for industrial applications

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-504.1 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
EC-504.2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
EC-504.3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 2
EC-504.4 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 2
EC-504.5 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 2 2.6 2.2 2.6 2.2 3 1.6 2.3
3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped

192
 LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Power Electronic Devices

1.1 List different thyristor family devices.
1.2 Sketch the ISI circuit symbols of SCR, SCS, SBS, SUS, DIAC, TRIAC and GTO SCR
1.3 Explain the construction and working of SCR
1.4 Explain the Two-transistor model of SCR and its VI Characteristics
1.5 Mention the ratings of SCR
1.6 Explain the construction and working of GTO SCR
1.7 Explain construction and working of DIAC & TRIAC
1.8 Explain Volt-ampere characteristics of DIAC & TRIAC
1.9 State the different modes of TRIAC triggering.
1.10 Compare the features of SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR
1.11 Explain the construction and working of UJT
1.12 Define intrinsic stand-off ratio of UJT
1.13 Explain negative resistance region of UJT
1.14 Explain SCR triggering using UJT
1.15 Explain about speed control of DC motor using SCR
1.16 List the applications of DIAC, TRIAC & SCR
2.0 Inverters, SMPS, UPS& Battery Management
2.1 State the need of inverters
2.2 State the principle of operation of inverter
2.3 Explain the working of MOSFET based Inverter circuit
2.4 Explain Voltage control of inverter using PWM
2.5 List the applications of inverters
2.6 Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram
2.7 List the applications of SMPS
2.8 Explain the workingof Off Line UPS and Online UPS
2.9 List the applications of UPS
2.10 List various Batteries used in Industries and e-vehicles
2.11 State the importance of Battery Management
2.12 Explain about the Battery management concepts used in e-vehicles
2.13 List various methods used for charging for Battery
2.14 Explain the charging circuit for Battery
2.15 Explain the various stages of charging Battery
2.16 Explain the concept of short circuit protection of Battery
2.17 Explain the concept of Overload protection of Battery
2.18 Explain the the concept of deep discharge protection of Battery
2.19 Explain the concept of overheat protection of Battery

3.0 Transducers and Ultrasonics

3.1 Define the term transducer
3.2 Classify different electrical/electronic transducers on the basis of principle of operation and
applications.
3.3 List different Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive transducers
3.4 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of resistance strain gauge.
3.5 Explain the working principle, construction and applications of potentiometric transducer.
3.6 Explain the construction and working of LVDT

193
 3.7 State the concept of piezo-electric effect
3.8 Explain the construction and working of Piezo-electric transducer
3.9 Explain the construction and working of Thermocouple transducer
3.10 Explain the working principle of Accelerometer
3.11 Define the term ultrasonics
3.12 State the concept of magnetostriction effect
3.13 Explain the construction and working of magnetostriction ultrasonic generator
3.14 Explain the construction and working of piezoelectric ultrasonic generator
3.15 List the applications of ultrasonics
3.16 Explain the construction and working of pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector

4.0 Control Systems

4.1. Define system and Control system.
4.2. Classify control systems
4.3. Explain the basic block diagram of control system
4.4. Explain an open loop control system.
4.5. Give examples for open loop control system.
4.6. Give three merits and demerits of open loop control.
4.7. Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram.
4.8. Give Examples for closed loop system
4.9. Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.
4.10. Define Transfer function
4.11. Explain block diagram reduction techniques.
4.12. Solve simple problems using the block diagram reduction techniques

5.0 PLCs &SCADA Programming

5.1. Explain the need for PLC
5.2. Explain the basic principle of PLCs.
5.3. List out the advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s.
5.4. Draw and explain the functional block diagram of PLC.
5.5. Explain the Ladder diagrams and sequence listing.
5.6. Draw ladder diagram for OR logic and write the PLC code.
5.7. Draw ladder diagram for AND logic and write the PLC code.
5.8. Draw ladder diagram for XOR logic and write the PLC code
5.9. Explain the importance of PLC timers with examples.
5.10. Explain the importance of PLC counters with examples.
5.11. List the features of popular PLCs like Siemens,Allenbradly.
5.12. List any 4 applications of PLCS in the industry.
5.13. Mention the importance of SCADA.
5.14. Explain a typical SCADA system.
5.15. List the applications of SCADA.

COURSE CONTENTS

1. Power Electronic Devices

Thyristor family devices- ISI circuit symbols - working of SCR-Two-transistor model of SCR and its VI
Characteristics-ratings of SCR- working of GTO SCR- working of DIAC & TRIAC- Volt-ampere
characteristics of DIAC & TRIAC-modes of TRIAC triggering-SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR -construction and
working of UJT-intrinsic stand-off ratio of UJT-negative resistance region of UJT-SCR triggering using
UJT, Speed control of DC motor using SCR,applications of SCR,TRIAC and DIAC.

194
2. Inverters, SMPS, UPS & Battery Management
Need of inverters -MOSFET based Inverter circuit- PWM Voltage control of Inverter -SMPS with
block diagram-applications of SMPS -Off Line UPS and Online UPS-Different Batteries used in
Industry and e-vehicles- Battery charging & Battery management concepts

3. Transducers &Ultrasonics
Introduction, classification of transducers, Resistive, Inductive, capacitive transducers, Strain gauge,
Potentiometric transducer, LVDT. Piezoelectric effect, Piezoelectric transducer, Thermocouple
transducer, accelerometers, Ultrasonic generation –Pulsed echo ultrasonic flaw detector

4. Control systems
Definition of system and Control system-open loop control system-merits and demerits of open
loop control-closed loop system-comparison between open loop and closed loop control systems-
Transfer function

5 PLC and SCADA

Need for PLC- principle of PLCs- advantages and disadvantages of PLC’s- functional block diagram
of PLC- Ladder diagrams and sequence listing- ladder diagram for OR, AND, XOR logic and PLC
code-importance of PLC timers with examples- importance of PLC counters with examples-
features of popular PLCs like Siemens,AllenBradly- applications of PLCS- importance of SCADA-
typical SCADA system- applications of SCADA.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bimbhra P.S, Power Electronics, Khanna Publishers Delhi

2. P.C.Sen.,PowerElectronics, McGraw Hill Education, India
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee, Industrial Electronics andControl, McGraw Hill Education,
India
4. User manuals of PLCs,SCADA
5. Nagarath&Gopal, Control system Engineering, 5th edition, New age international Publishers
6. Muhammad H. Rashid,Power electronics (Devices, circuits & applications), 4th edition,
PERSON
7. V.R Moorthi, Power electronics: Devices, circuits & Industrial applications, OXFORD
Publications
8. PLCs &SCADA : Theory and Practice by Rajesh Mehra, Vikrant Vij- Laxmi Publications

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 2.12
Unit Test-II From 3.1 to 5.13

195
 EC-505, DATA COMMUNCATION AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
Course No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Data Communcation and
EC-505 05 75 20 80
Computer Networks

No. of
No. of
No. of Weightage Short COs
S No Unit Title Essay
Periods of Marks Answer Mapped
Questions
Questions
Basics of Data
1 communication and OSI 13 16 2 1 CO1
Reference Model
Physical Layer and Data
2 15 19 3 1 CO2
Link Layer
Network Layer, Transport
3 Layer and Application 28 36 2 3 CO3
Layer
Wireless Network
4 12 26 1 2 CO4
Protocols
5 Cyber Security 7 16 2 1 CO5
Total Periods/Marks 75 110 30 80

1. To familiarize with Basics of Data Communcation and the layers of OSI Model
Course
2. To analyze various wireless network protocols
Objectives
3. To analyze wireless Security protocols

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-505.1 Describe data communication and OSI model
CO2 EC-505.2 Describe Physical and data link layers
CO3 EC-505.3 Analyze network layers
CO4 EC-505.4 Describe Wireless Network Protocols
CO5 EC-505.5 Describe Cyber Security

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-505.1 3 2 2 3 3 3 1
EC-505.2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-505.3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1
EC-505.4 3 3 2 3 1 3 1
EC-505.5 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 2.6 1.8 3 3 2.2 3 2.3 2
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

196
 LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Basics of Data communication and OSI Reference Model

1.1 Define data and information
1.2 Define data communication
1.3 State the characteristics of data communication
1.4 State the components of data communication
1.5 Explain briefly about data representation of numbers, text, images, audio and video
1.6 Define the different modes of data flow (simplex, half duplex and full duplex)
1.7 Distinguish between serial communication and parallel communication
1.8 Define computer network and state its use
1.9 State the need for data communication networking.
1.10 Define network topology
1.11 List different network topologies
1.12 Explain Bus, Star, Ring network topologies
1.13 Compare the performances of the above three topologies.
1.14 Draw the ISO: OSI 7-layer architecture and State the functions of each layer.
1.15 Draw TCP/IP reference model and State the functions of each layer
1.16 Compare ISO: OSI7-layer model with TCP/IP reference model

2.0 Physical Layer and Data Link Layer

a) Physical Layer:

2.1 List the different types of physical transmission media used in networking
2.2 Explain the cross-sectional diagrams of UTP, STP, Coaxial and Fiber optic cables and their use
in networking.
2.3 List the three types of switching techniques used in networking
2.4 Explain circuit switching and packet switching
2.5 Define virtual circuit and datagram approaches in packet switching
2.6 State the use of repeater/ hub
b) Data Link Layer:

2.7 Define the word protocolused in computer networks

2.8 State the need for protocols in computer networks.
2.9 Explain CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA
2.10 Explain Ethernet LAN
2.11 Give the frame format for Ethernet and State the different fields in it.
2.12 Explain the working of token ring network

3.0 Network Layer, Transport Layer and Application Layer

a) Network Layer:

3.1 Define the terms Internet and Intranet.

3.2 Explain classful addressing in IPv4.
3.3 Explain classless addressing (CIDR) in IPv4.
3.4 State the use of routers in networking
3.5 Explain the concept of routers and routing packets in computer networks
3.6 Distinguish among cut through, store-and-forward and adaptive switch mechanisms.
3.7 Explain the packet transfer mechanism using routers and IP address.

197
 b) Transport Layer

3.8 List the features of Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

3.9 Explain the flow control in TCP
3.10 Explain error control in TCP
3.11 Explain the connectivity of systems using TCP (Three-way hand shake)
3.12 Explain end-to-end connectivity in TCP using ports and sockets.
3.13 Describe the features of User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
3.14 Compare the features of TCP and UDP
3.15 State the use of Gateway Router.
c) Application Layer:

3.16 Mention the role of DNS server

3.17 Explain how email is transferred
3.18 Discuss POP server and SMTP server
3.19 Explain file transfer operation using FTP
3.20 Explain the working of Web server
3.21 Describe the web browser architecture
3.22 Explain the internal architecture of ISP
3.23 Write the purpose of proxy server
3.24 Explain remote login

4.0 Wireless Network Protocols

4.1 Define the term Wireless LAN.
4.2 List the advantages of WLAN.
4.3 Explain the topology of wireless LAN and its frame format (IEEE 802.11)
4.4 State the features of Bluetooth technology.
4.5 State the applications of Bluetooth technology.
4.6 Compare the features of IEEE 802.11n and IEEE 802.11b.
4.7 State the necessity of Low-rate WPAN (IEEE 802.15.4)
4.8 Explain the Low-WPAN (IEEE 802.15.4) device architecture.
4.9 Explain the features of Zigbee Technology and its topologies.
4.10 Explain the architecture ofLoWPAN and its protocol stack.
4.11 State the features of LoRaWAN
4.12 List the applications of LoRaWAN
4.13 Differntiate between WiFi and LoRaWAN
4.14 Explain the architecture of LoRaWAN
4.15 State the features and applications of Sigfox

5.0 Cyber Security

5.1 Define the term Cyber Security.
5.2 State the necessity of Cyber Security.
5.3 State the fundamentals of Cyber Securtiy.
5.4 List the layers of Cyber Securty.
5.5 Explain the active and passive attacks in Cyber attacks.
5.6 Explain the functions of firewall
5.7 Define the terms: i) virus ii) malware iii) adware iv) trogan v) worm related to
computersecurity
5.8 List the features of a typical “total security” tools
5.9 List different types of viruses and various ways of removing viruses
5.10 List any six popular Anti-Virus Software available in market

198
COURSE CONTENTS:

1.0 Basics of Data communication and OSI Reference Model

Need for data communication networking, networktopology, different network topologies,

Bus, Star, Ring network topologies, OSI 7-layer architecture- functions of each layer, TCP/IP
reference model- functions of each layer

2.0 Physical Layer and Data Link Layer

a) Physical Layer:

Different physical transmission media- UTP, STP, Coaxial and Fiber optic cable, switching
techniques - circuit switching, packet switching and message switching, virtual circuit and
datagram approaches in packet switching, use of repeater/hub

b) Data Link Layer:

Protocol, need for protocols, need for framing, need for flow control and error control
protocols, medium access control (MAC) - its functions, CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA, Local area
network - its use, Ethernet and its frame format, working of token ring network.

3.0 Network Layer, Transport Layer and Application Layer

a) Network Layer:

Internet and Intranet, classful addressing and classless addressing in IPv4, use of routers in
networking, concept of routers and routing, cut through & store-and-forward and adaptive
switch mechanism, packet transfer mechanism using routers and IP address.

b) Transport Layer
Features of Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), flow control in TCP, error control in TCP,
connectivity of systems using TCP (Three-way hand shake), end-to-end connectivity in TCP
using ports and sockets, features of User Datagram Protocol (UDP), use of Gateway Router

c) Application Layer:

Role of DNS server, how email is transferred, POP server and SMTP server, FTP working of
Web server, web browser architecture, internal architecture of ISP, purpose of proxy server,
remote login

4. Wireless Network Protocols

Wireless Network technologies- IEEE802.11, IEEE802.11 architecture, frame format, features

and applications of Bluetooth technology, Low-rate WPAN (IEEE 802.15.4) device
architecture, Zigbee Technology topologies, 6LoWPAN architecture-Protocol stack.

5. Cyber Security

Basic Cyber Security Concepts, fundamentals and layers of security, Cyber attacker actions,
active attacks, passive attacks, functions of firewall, define the terms: i) virus ii) malware iii)

199
 adware iv) trogan v) worm related to computer security, List the features of a typical “total
security” tool, List different types of viruses and various ways of removing viruses, List any
six popular Anti-Virus Software available in market

Reference Books:

1. Ata Elahi Thomson, Network communication Technology

2. Godbole, Data Communication and Networking,TMH
3. William Stallings ,Data and Computer Communications, 7thedition. PHI
4. BehrouzForouzan, Data Communication and Networking, 3rdedition.TMH
5. Nina Godbole and SunitBelpure, Cyber Security Understanding Cyber Crimes,Computer
Forensics and Legal Perspectives,Wiley
6. B.B.Gupta,D.P.Agrawal,HaoxiangWang,ComputerandCyberSecurity:Principles, Algorithm,
Applications, and Perspectives, CRC Press
7. Wayne Tomasi, Introduction to data communication and networking, Pearson India
Publications
8. Thomas Robertazzi, Basics of computer networking, Springer publishers.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit Test-II From 3.7 to 5.8

200
 EC-506, EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Embedded Systems
EC-506 03 45 40 60
Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

Familiarise with ARM CORTEX M3 evaluation
1 board/ARDUINO DUE Board (contains ARM 3 CO1
cortex M3)

Femiliarise with Keil uVision-5 tool/compiler

3 3 CO3
ARDUINO IDE (or equivalent software)

Programming and Interfacing with ARM

4 39 CO4
CORTEX M3

Total 45

To get acquient with ARM CORTEX M3 evaluation board/ARDUINO DUE Board

(contains ARM cortex M3)
Course
Objectives To work with Keil uVision-5 tool/compiler/ ARDUINO IDE (or equivalent software)
Programming and Interfacing with ARM CORTEX M3

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-506.1 Acquient with KeiluVision-5 tool/compiler
CO2 EC-506.2 Work with Keil uVision-5 tool/compiler
CO3 EC-506.3 Programming and Interfacing with ARM CORTEX M3

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-506.1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1 1
EC-506.2 3 3 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 1
EC-506.3 3 3 1 2 3 3 2 3 2 3
EC-506.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 1.5 1.75 3 3 2 3 1.75 2

3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

201
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Conduct the following experiments on an ARM CORTEX M3 evaluation board/ ARDUINO DUE
Board (contains ARM cortex M3) using evaluation version of Embedded 'C' &Keil uVision-5
tool/ ARDUINO IDE (or equivalent software).
2. Femiliarise with ARM CORTEX M3 evaluation board/ ARDUINO DUE Board (contains ARM
cortex M3)
3. Femiliarise with KeiluVision-5 tool/ ARDUINO IDE (or equivalent software)
4. Write a C program for blinking LED/LEDs with a one second interval of time and Interface the
LED/LEDs to ARM CORTEX M3 controller/ ARDUINO DUE and test it.
5. Write a C program for switch Interface with ARM based microcontroller/ ARDUINO DUE to
read status of switch/switches and display the in LED/Relay/Buzzer. Interface the
LED/Relay/Buzzer to ARM CORTEX M3 controller and test it.
6. Write a C program to interface a 4x4 keypad and an LCD to display the keycode on an LCD.
Interface the keypad and LCD to ARM CORTEX M3 controller/ ARDUINO DUE and test it.
7. Write a C program to rotate DC motor in clockwise and anticlockwise direction with different
speed using ARM based microcontroller. Interface the DC motor to ARM CORTEX M3
controller/ ARDUINO DUE and verify its working
8. Write a C program to control and run the stepper motor in half step and full step mode using
ARM based microcontroller. Interface the DC motor to ARM CORTEX M3 controller/
ARDUINO DUE and verify it’s working.
9. Design and test a C program to display temperature (using DHT11 temperature& humidity
sensor) on LCD by interfacing temperature sensor using ARM based microcontroller/
ARDUINO DUE.
10. Interface Flame sensor with ARDUINO DUE and turn on Buzzer when flame detected
11. Interface Ultrasonic sensor with ARDUINO DUE to measure the distance from the target
12. Interface RTC with ARDUINO DUE and display Date, Time on LCD display

-0o0-

202
 EC-507, INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND AUTOMATION LAB

Course No of Total no of Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week periods for FA for SA
Industrial Electronics
EC-507 03 45 40 60
and Automation Lab

S No Unit Title No. of Periods COs Mapped

1 Power electronic devices 21

CO1
3 Transducers 9
CO3
4 PLCs 15
CO4
Total 45

1. To familiarize with power electronic devices, opto electronic devices, Transducers

Course
Objectives 2. To familiarize with PLC
3. To learn the practical importance and applications of Industrial electronics
devices and PLC

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-507.1 Plot V-I characteristics of Power Electronic devices.
CO2 EC-507.2 Plot V-I characteristics of Transducers.
CO3 EC-507.3 Know the application and usage of PLC.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-507.1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1 1
EC-507.2 3 3 1 1 3 3 2 3 1 1
EC-507.3 3 3 1 2 3 3 2 3 2 3
Average 3 3 1.5 1.75 3 3 2 3 1.75 2

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped

203
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

I. Power electronic devices

1. Perform an experiment to obtain VI characteristics of SCR

2. Perform an experiment to obtain VI characteristics of TRIAC
3. Perform an experiment to obtain VI characteristics of DIAC
4. Perform an experiment to obtain VI characteristics of UJT
5. construct UJT relaxation oscillator circuit and observe the output waveforms on CRO
6. Construct a circuit to trigger SCR by UJT and control output Power

III. Transducers

7. Obtain the performance characteristics of LVDT by conducting an experiment

8. Obtain the performance characteristics of thermocouple by conducting an experiment

IV. Programmable Logic Controllers

9. Familiarize with PLC tutor or PSIM

10. Implement basic gates and universal gates using PLC
11. Implement XOR, XNOR gates using PLC
12. Implement a counter using PLC
-0o0-

204
 EC-508, LIFE SKILLS

Total No. of Marks Marks for

Course Code Course Title No. of Periods/Week
Periods for FA SA

EC-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60

Understand the relevance of life skills in both personal and professional lives
Course
Objectives Practise life skills complementarily in life-management to lead a happy and successful
life

Course Outcomes:
CO1 exhibit right attitude and be adaptable in adverse and diverse situations
CO2 set appropriate goals and achieve them through proper planning, time management
and self-motivation
CO3 solve diverse real-life and professional problems with critical thinking and creativity for
a stress-free life
CO4 be an ideal team player and manifest as a leader

Course Delivery:

Text book: “Life Skills” – by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

Sl no Unit Teaching
Hours
1 Attitude 4
2 Adaptability 4
3 Goal Setting 4
4 Motivation 4
5 Time Management 4
6 Critical Thinking 4
7 Creativity 4
8 Problem Solving 5
9 Team work 4
10 Leadership 4
11 Stress Management 4
Total 45

205
Course Content:

UNIT I:Attitude matters!

Preparatory activity-Role play; Generating word bank; Types of attitude. Read the passage and
answer the related questions, read the story and discuss issues raised; Express opinions on the given
topic and fill the grid with relevant words.

UNIT 2: Adaptability… makes life easy!

Pair work-Study the given pictures and understand adaptability -read the anecdote and discuss, read
the story and answer the questions, role play

UNIT 3: Goal Setting… life without a goal is a rudderless boat!

Short term goals and long term goals-SMART features, observe the pictures and answer questions-
matching- read the passage and answer questions-filling the grid.

UNIT 4: Motivation… triggers success!

Types of motivation-difference between motivation and inspiration- matching different
personalities with traits - dialogue followed by questions - writing a paragraph based on the passage.

UNIT 5: Time Management … the need of the hour!

Effective Time Management- Time quadrant - Group task on management of time- Time wasters-fill
in the grid, read the story and answer the questions- prioritising tasks.

UNIT 6: Critical Thinking… Logic is the key!

Preparatory activity-read the passage and answer the questions- differentiate between facts and
assumptions- components of critical thinking- complete the sets of analogies- choose the odd one
out- true or false statements- decide which of the conclusions are logical.

UNIT 7: Creativity…. The essential YOU!!

Definition- Pre-activity-read the anecdote and answer the questions- matching celebrities with their
fields of specialisation- think of creative uses of objects- think creatively in the given situations.

UNIT 8: Problem Solving… there is always a way out!

Preparatory activity-read the story and answer the questions- discuss the given problem and come
out with three alternative solutions- group activity to select the best solution among available
alternatives- discuss the problem and plan to analyse it.

UNIT 9: Team Work… Together we are better!

Advantages of team work- Characteristics of a team player- Activity-Observe the pictures and classify
them into two groups- team game - read the story and answer the questions- fill in the grid.

UNIT 10 : Leadership… the making of a leader!

Characteristics of effective leadership- styles of leadership- Activity-read the dialogue and answer
the questions- identify the people in the picture and describe them- discuss leadership qualities of
the given leaders- filling the grid- read the quotes and write the name of the leader.

206
UNIT 11: Stress Management … live life to the full !!

Types of stress- Strategies for Stress Management- Activity-read the passage and answer the
questions, read the situation and write a paragraph about how to manage stress.

Mapping COs with POs

POs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, can’t
COs 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
directly be mapped with Life Skills

Unit wise Mapping of COs- POs

CO Course Outcome CO Unit PO mapped Cognitive levels as per

Mapped Bloom’s Taxonomy
R/U/Ap/An/Ev/Cr
( Remembering /
Understanding/
Applying/Analysing/
Evaluating/ Creating )
CO 1 To exhibit right attitude and All Units 6,7 U/Ap/ An
be adaptable to adverse and ( 1 to 11)
diverse situations
CO2 To set appropriate goals and Units 6,7 U/Ap/An
achieve them through proper 3,4,5
planning, time management
and self-motivation
CO3 To solve diverse real-life and Units 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev/ Cr.
professional problems with 6,7,8,11
critical thinking and creativity
for a stress-free life
CO4 To be an ideal team player Units 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev
and manifest as a leader 9,10

207
 EC-509, ADVANCED COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING LAB

Course No of Total no Marks Marks

Course title
Code periods/week of periods for FA for SA
AdvancedCommunication
EC-509 03 45 40 60
andNetworking Lab

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1. Microwave Communications 12 CO1

2. Antennas 9 CO2
3. Fiber optic Communication 9 CO3
Data Communication and Computer
4. 15 CO4
Networks
Total 45

1. To familiarise with microwave Devices, Antennas and o handle the

microwave bench
Course Objectives 2. To handle the Optical bench to perform various measurements.
3. To learn the practical importance of microwave devices and antennas,
Networking and fiber optic communication methods.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 EC-509.1 Understand various microwave components and devices.
CO2 EC-509.2 Interpret the radiation characteristics of various antennas
CO3 EC-509.3 Understand the light propagation through optical fiber
Perform experiments on Computer Networking and handle advanced
CO4 EC-509.4
communication gadgets

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
EC-509.1 3 1 3 1 2 3 1 1
EC-509.2 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
EC-509.3 3 3 1 2 3 2
EC-509.4 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3
Average 3 1 2 3 2 3 2.25 3 1 2

3=strongly mapped ,2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped

208
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1.0 Microwave Communications

1. Conduct an experiment to plot the Characteristics of Reflex Klystron
2. Conduct an experiment to plot the Characteristics of Gunn diode
3. Conduct an experiment to measure VSWR
4. Conduct an experiment to determine the frequency in a rectangular wave guide

2.0 Antennas
1. Plot the radiation pattern of simple dipole antenna
2. Plot the radiation pattern of simple folded dipole antenna
3. Study the radiation pattern of parabolic antenna

3.0 Fiber Optics

1. Set up fiber optic analogue link and demonstrate analog signal transmission
2. Set up a fiber optic digital link and demonstrate digital data transmission
3. Set up fiber optic voice link and demonstrate voice communication

4.0 Computer Networking

1. Identify and note down the specifications of various networking devices & Cables, Jacks,
Connectors, tools etc used in local area networks.
2. Prepare the UTP cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool
3. Setup LAN and a) transfer files between systems in LAN b) share the printer in a network
4. Test the network using ipconfig, ping / tracert and netstat utilities and debug the network
issues
5. Install and Configure wireless NIC and transfer files between systems in LAN and wireless
LAN

-0o0-

209
 EC-510, PROJECT WORK

No. of Total
Course Marks Marks
Course Title periods No. of
Code for FA for SA
/ Week Periods
EC-510 Project Work 3 45 40 60

• Enhance the knowledge by innovative learning and get the

skills through the teamwork
Course Objectives • Provide with the opportunity to synthesize knowledge from
various areas of learning
• Critically and creatively apply it to real life situations

CO1 Organising teamwork.

COURSE CO2 Innovative learning.
OUT COMES CO3 Apply theoretical knowledge to practical work situations.
CO4 Practice technical project reports preparation and presentation.
PO-CO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
Average 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 3 2 2
3=strongly mapped,2=moderately mapped ,1=slightly mapped
Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be met by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quiz (vii)
Industry Visits (viii) Tech Fest (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.

Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to exhibit the following skill sets:
1. Problem solving and Critical Thinking
1.1 Identify different works to be carried out in the Project
1.2 Collect data relevant to the project work
1.3 Carryout need survey
1.4 Select the most efficient method from the available choices based on preliminary investigation
1.5 Design the required elements of the project work as per standard practices
1.6 Prepare the working modules / equipment required for the project work

210
1.7 Estimate the cost of project, technological need, computer skills, materials and other
equipment
1.8 Prepare the plan and schedule of starting time and sequence of operations to be carried out
at various stages of the project work in detail
1.9 Prepare critical activities at various stages of the project work
1.10 Test various conditions with different electrical input parameter if required
1.11 Implement project work and record the results.
1.12 Draw Appropriate Conclusions
1.13 Preparation of project report.

2. Communication
2.1 Communicate effectively.
2.2 Present Ideas Clearly.
2.3 Present Ideas Coherently.
2.4 Report writing.
3. Collaboration
1.1 Discuss the ideas.
1.2 Coordinate with team members
1.3 Team work in accomplishing the task.
4. Independent Learning
4.1 Involves in the group task.
4.2 Analyse the appropriate actions.
4.3 Compares merits and demerits
4.4 Analyse the activities for sustainability
4.5 Analyse the activities to ensure ethics
5. Ethics
5.1 Give respect and value to all classmates, educators, colleagues, and others
5.2 Understand the health, safety, and environmental impacts of their work
5.3 Recognize the constraints of limited resources
5.4 Develop sustainable products and processes that protect the health, safety, and prosperity of
future generations
5.5 Maintain integrity in all conduct and publications and give due credit to the contributions of
others

211
COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Design/Assembling/Analysis/Case Study Projects in the areas of Electronics &Communication

Engineering
Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes of Project work
S. No Item Marks
Internal Marks
Completion of Assigned task in the group/individual to complete 40
the project
1 End Exam Marks:
i) Demonstration of skill relevant to the project (30)
ii) Project Report (20) 60
iii) Viva Voce (10)
Total marks 100
➢ End Examination assessment shall be done by HECES, external examiners and faculty
members who guided the students during project work.
➢ The external examiner shall be from an industry/organisation/Head of ECE of other
polytechnic/Senior faculty of another polytechnic.

-0o0-

212
VI Semester

213
 DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
C-23-VI Semester

EC-601, INDUSTRIAL TRAINING

Subject Scheme of evaluation

SI.No. Duration
Item Nature Max. Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First Assessment
outcomes by both
at Industry (After 120
the faculty and
12 Weeks)
training mentor of
the industry
Assessment of
2.Second learning
Assessment at the outcomes by both
120
Industrial Industry (After 20 the faculty and
1 6 months
Training weeks)) training mentor of
the industry
Training Report 20
Demonstration of
any one of the
Final Summative 30
skills listed in
assessment at
learning
institution level
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

The Industrial Training shall carry maximum 300 marks. Pass mark is 50% in first and second
assessment put together and also 50% in final summative assessment at the institution level.

214
 INDUSTRIALTRAINING
Marks for Marks for
Course Code Course Title Duration Formative Summative
Assessment Assessment

EC-601 Industrial Training 24 weeks 240 60

Time schedule
S.NO Code TOPICS Duration

• Practical training in Industry

• Training Report Preparation Six
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate,
1 MEC-601 Months
Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents (introduction of
Industry, Plant Layout, Organization Chart, List of Major
Equipment’s, List of Processes: Skills Acquired, Conclusions,
References

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.Expose to real time working environment
2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
3. Acquire the required skills of troubleshooting of various
Course Objectives electronic devices, assembling, servicing, and supervising in the
engineering fields.
4. Install the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self-
confidence.
COURSE OUT CO1 Apply theory to practical work situations
COMES CO2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
CO3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
CO4 Write report in technical projects
PO-CO Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low

Learning Outcomes

The student shall be able to display the following skill sets

1) Use appropriate tools/instruments for a given purpose and measure the values using
instruments
2) Assembling and disassembling of circuits
3) Coding and debugging

215
 4) Troubleshoot/ Rectification of the problem
5) Design and Fabrication of the circuit
6) Soft skills and Reporting
Scheme of evaluation

Course Scheme of evaluation

Sl.No. Duration
Item Nature Max. Marks
Assessment of
Learning outcomes
1.First Assessment
by both the faculty
at Industry (After 12 120
and training
Weeks)
Mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
2.Second Learning outcomes
Industrial Assessment at the by both the faculty
1 6 months 120
Training Industry (After 22 and training
weeks) Mentor of the
industry
Final Summative Training Report 20
assessment at Demonstration of
institution level any one of the 30
skills listed in
learning outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300

Weightage of marks for Assessment of Skill sets during first and second assessment.

Skill Set Sl. Max Marks Allotted

SKILL SET
No For each parameter
Use appropriate tools/instruments for a given
1 15
purpose and measure the values using instruments
2 Assembling and disassembling of circuits 20
3 Programming/Coding/debugging 15
4 Troubleshoot/ Rectification of the problem 20
5 Design and Fabrication of the circuit 25
6 Soft skills and Reporting Skills 25
Total 120

During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which
the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e., either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.

216
 Illustration
If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely serial number 1, 3, 4, 5 of
above skill sets) and marks awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80 marks, then the marks of 50
shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (50/80) *120=75.
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
1. Duration of the training: 6 months.
2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students may be trained in the fields
Fabrication/Foundry/Manufacturing/Service/Drafting/Maintenance etc.
4. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
5. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall reappear
for 6 months industrial training.
6. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the industry,
where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the concerned
section in the institution.
7. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at industry
(first and second assessment),50% in final summative assessment at institution level and put
together i.e., 150 marks out of 300 marks.
8. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level, the
student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board examination.
9. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including Head of the
section (of concerned discipline ONLY), External examiner and Faculty members who assessed
the students during Industrial Training as members.
Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students’
performance during industrial training:
➢ Shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.
➢ Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the training
period, and shall check it scrupulously.
➢ Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
➢ Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for improvement.
➢ Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedules.
➢ Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
➢ Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during 1 st and 2nd
assessments
➢ Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like photographs,
articles, videos etc.
➢ Shall act as co-examiner along with other examiners in the final assessment at institution.
➢ Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
➢ Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students learning in
all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective).
Guidelines to the Training Mentor in the industry:
➢ Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
➢ Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member.
➢ Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
➢ Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
➢ Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any misbehaviour as
the case may be.
➢ Every Teacher (including HoD if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a batch of students of 10 to
15 for industrial training irrespective of student’s placements for training.

217
 Rubrics for assessment:
Department of Technical Education
Name of the institution
Industrial training assessment
PIN: Name of the student:
Completes
Max Marks the task, Completes Makes
Skill Precisely
Allotted mistakes the task, attempt,
Set completes
SKILL SET For each are absent, Mistakes Mistakes
Sl. No the task
parameter but not are a few are many
Precise
1 Use appropriate tools/instruments
for a given purpose and measure
the values using instruments (15)
(i)Identification of tools and 5 5 3 2 1
instruments
(ii)Testing of components and 5 5 3 2 1
devices
(iii) Measuring the parameter 5 5 3 2 1
2 Assembling and disassembling the
equipment with proper tool (20)
(i) Disassembling 10 10 7 6 3
(ii) Assembling 10 10 7 6 3
3 Programming/Coding/Debugging
(15)
(i) Programming/Coding 10 10 7 6 3
(ii) Debugging 5 5 3 2 1
4 Troubleshooting/Rectification of
theproblem. (20)
(i) Fault-Finding 10 10 7 6 3
(ii)Removal and Replacement of 5 5 3 2 1
spare parts
(iii) Testing the working condition. 5 5 3 3 2
5 Design and Fabrication of the
Circuits (25)
(i) Designing of circuit. 15 15 10 9 6
(ii) Fabrication of Circuits 10 10 7 6 3
6 Soft skills and Reporting skills (25)
(i)Communication Skills 5 5 4 3 2
(oral/writing skills)
(ii) Human relations. 5 5 3 3 2
(iii) Supervisory abilities. 5 5 3 3 2
(iv) Reporting technical issues 5 5 4 3 2
(v)Maintenance of records in the 5 5 3 3 2
industry.
Total Marks 120 120 80 67 38
*Mistakes are with reference to Technique, Procedure & precautions, while precision refers to technique,
procedure, precautions, time & result
(Marks awarded in words: )

Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the faculty incharge (Guide)
Name Name
Designation Designation

-0o0-

218